Download Pioneer RCS-404H User's Manual
Transcript
RCS-606H SX-SW606 S-ST606 DVR-640H-AV Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer Speaker System DVD Recorder RCS-505H SX-SW404 S-ST404 DVR-640H-AV Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer Speaker System DVD Recorder RCS-404H SX-SW404 S-ST404 DVR-440H-AV Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer Speaker System DVD Recorder ™ Discover the benefits of registering your product online at www.pioneer.co.uk (www.pioneer-eur.com) Operating Instructions ™ Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference. IMPORTANT CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. D3-4-2-1-1_En-A WARNING WARNING This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain D3-4-2-1-3_A_En or moisture. Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully. The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230V D3-4-2-1-4_A_En or 120V) written on the rear panel. Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity: +5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En WARNING To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En equipment. This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and D3-4-2-1-9a_En 93/68/EEC). CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: top of the unit CAUTION ATTENTION ADVARSEL VARNING VORSICHT PRECAUCI”N VARO! VRW2262 - A CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM. RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. …VITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR≈LING VED ≈BNING. UNDG≈ UDS∆ TTELSE FOR STR≈LING. KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR≈LNING NƒR DENNA DEL ƒR ÷PPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSƒTTA DIG F÷R STR≈LEN. BEI GE÷FFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERƒTEINNEREN VORHANDEN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN! CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACI”N L¡ SER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICI”N A LOS RAYOS L¡ SER. AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NƒKYVƒLLE JA NƒKYMƒTT÷MƒLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSƒTEILYLLE. ƒLƒ KATSO SƒTEESEEN. D3-4-2-1-8_B_En CAUTION The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). VENTILATION CAUTION (Receiver subwoofer) When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 5 cm at top, 5 cm at rear, and 5 cm at each side). VENTILATION CAUTION (DVD Recorder) When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 10 cm at each side). WARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En equipment on thick carpet or a bed. 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm 10 cm POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En 10 cm Receiver subwoofer 10 cm DVD Recorder This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the K041_En warranty period. If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling. Private households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one). For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health. K058_En English If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En on vacation). Section One Chapter 1 Contents Section One 04 Remote control.............................................. 15 01 Contents........................................................... 4 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 17 What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 02 Speaker Setup Guide ...................................... 5 Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Home theater sound setup (RCS-606H). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Home theater sound setup (RCS-404H/RCS-505H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Front surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Wall mounting the center speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Wall mounting the speakers (RCS-404H/RCS-505H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Before mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . 8 05 Before you start ............................................ 18 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Watching a DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Listening to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Watching a title recorded on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 19 Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Section Two 03 Connecting up ............................................... 10 Operating instructions for the Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer and Speaker System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Using this system for TV audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Section Three Operating instructions for the DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 What’s in the box Please confirm that the following items are all supplied. • RF antenna cable (page 12) Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW606/SX-SW404) box: • Power cord (page 12) • Remote control (page 15) • AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) x2 (page 17) • Speaker cables x5 (page 11) • Power cord (page 12) • Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 6, 7) • AM loop antenna (page 10) • Non-skid pads (small) x20 (page 6, 7) • FM wire antenna (page 10) • Speaker stands x2 (page 7) • Control cable (page 10) • Screws (for speaker stands) x2 (page 7) Speakers (S–ST606) box: • Coaxial cable (page 10) • Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x1) (page 12) • Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 23) • Speaker cables x5 (page 11) • These operating instructions • Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 5) • Warranty card • Non-skid pads (large) x16 (page 5) DVD recorder (DVR–640H-AV/DVR–440H-AV) box: En • Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x1) (page 12) • Display unit (page 22) • Display cable (page 10) 4 Speakers (S–ST404) box: • Non-skid pads (small) x4 (page 5) • Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) (page 13) • Speaker stand bases x 4 (page 5) • G-LINK™ cable (page 53) • Screws (for bases) x 12 (page 5) Speaker Setup Guide Chapter 2 English Speaker Setup Guide Safety precautions when setting up When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing the speakers. Rear Home theater sound setup (RCS-606H) • This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. Front left Front right Center Front 2 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for the front and surround speakers, and the receiver subwoofer (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base (flat surface) of each speaker. Receiver subwoofer Non-skid pads (small) x 4 Center speaker Surround left Listening position Surround right 1 Attach the speaker stand bases to the stems using the screws provided. Once you have aligned the stem and base, secure with the small screws at the points shown below. Note that the speaker should face in the direction of the base of the isosceles triangle (outlined below). Non-skid pads (large) x 16 Non-skid pads (large) x 4 Front and surround speakers Receiver subwoofer 5 En Speaker Setup Guide 3 Secure each of the front and surround speakers using the metal catch provided. Screw two picture hooks or similar into the wall behind the speaker. Pass a chain or cord around the hooks and through the metal catch so that the speaker is stabilized (make sure to test that it supports the weight of the speaker). Home theater sound setup (RCS-404H/RCS-505H) Depending on the size and characteristics of your room, you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this system. After installing, make sure the speaker is securely fixed. Chain or cord Standard surround setup This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound. Front left Front right Metal catch Receiver subwoofer Center Caution • The metal catch is not a mounting fixture, and the speaker should not be hung directly from the wall using this catch. Always use a chain or cord when stabilizing the speaker. • Pioneer disclaims all responsibility for any losses or damage resulting from improper assembly, installation, insufficient strength of the installation materials, misuse, or natural disasters. Surround right Surround left Listening position 1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of each of the front, surround and center speakers. The four large non-skid pads are for the receiver subwoofer (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base (flat surface) of each speaker. 4 Connect the speaker system. Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. Front and surround speakers Non-skid pads (small) x 20 Center speaker After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 23) to complete your surround sound setup. Non-skid pads (large) x 4 6 En Receiver subwoofer Speaker Setup Guide English 2 Connect the speaker system. Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram (left) for optimal surround sound. After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 23) to complete your surround sound setup. 3 Make sure the Front Surround mode is switched off. See the operating instructions for more on using Front Surround. Front speakers Speaker stands Non-skid pads (small) x 20 Front surround setup This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker placement isn't possible or you want to avoid running long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup together with the Front Surround modes in page 26 to take advantage of wall and ceiling reflections for a very realistic surround effect. Surround right Surround left Front left Center Front right Receiver subwoofer Center speaker Non-skid pads (large) x 4 Receiver subwoofer 2 Attach the surround speakers to the speaker stands. For each speaker, line up the spurs on the stand with the holes on the back of the speaker and insert, then secure the speaker to the stand with the screw provided. Listening position 1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of the front and center speakers and to the speaker stands. The four large non-skid pads are for the receiver subwoofer (as shown). Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base (flat surface) of each speaker or stand. 3 Connect the speaker system. Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram (left) for optimal surround sound (the surround speakers are next to the front speakers). 7 En Speaker Setup Guide 4 Turn the speakers as shown, following the guide marks for optimal Front Surround. If you have selected FRTMOVIE (Front Surround Movie) or FRTMUSIC (Front Surround Music), turn each surround speaker so that the guide markers on the stand base are lined up horizontally in the direction the listening position (see below). With EXTPOWER (Extra Power), the surround speakers should point in the same direction as the front speakers (see below). Wall mounting the speakers (RCS-404H/RCS-505H) In addition to the center speaker, the front and surround speakers also have holes for wall mounting. However, if you are using the Front Surround setup described on the previous page, do not wall mount the surround speakers. See Using Front Surround on page 26 for more information. 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm to 7 mm FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC EXTPOWER After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 23) to complete your surround sound setup. Caution • Please don’t attach the surround speakers to the wall for Front surround setup. Before mounting • Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that its weight could cause the screws to work loose, or the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to mount the speakers on is strong enough to support them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls. • Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws suitable for the wall material and support the weight of the speaker. Wall mounting the center speaker The center speaker has a mounting hole which can be used to mount the speaker on the wall. 5 mm Caution • If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the wall, consult a professional for advice. • Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or damage that result from improper installation. 10 mm Additional notes on speaker placement • Install the main front left and right speakers at an equal distance from the TV. • RCS-404H/505H only: For optimum effect, install the surround speakers slightly above ear level. • Install the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Precautions: 5 mm to 7 mm 8 En • When installing the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with tape or some other suitable means. Otherwise, the speaker may fall from the TV due to external shocks such as earthquakes, endangering those nearby or damaging the speaker. Speaker Setup Guide English • The front (L/R), center and surround (L/R) speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, depending on the installation location, color distortion may occur if the speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this happens, turn the power switch of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker system away from the television set. • The receiver subwoofer is not magnetically shielded and so should not be placed near a TV or monitor. Magnetic storage media (such as floppy discs and tape or video cassettes) should also not be kept close to the receiver subwoofer. • RCS-606H only: Do not attach the front, surround speakers and receiver subwoofer to the wall or ceiling. They may fall off and cause injury. • RCS-404H/505H only: Do not attach the receiver subwoofer to the wall or ceiling. They may fall off and cause injury. • For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals. • Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. • Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire. 9 En Connecting up Chapter 3 Connecting up Basic connections Important • When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket. Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW606/SX-SW404) FM antenna AM loop antenna 3 4 Display unit ANTENNA MCACC CONTROL IN SETUP MIC FM UNBAL 75Ω SYSTEM CONNECTOR CONTROL SPEAKERS OUT SUB WOOFER R SURROUND L AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL) AM LOOP ANTENNA ANALOG L R USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT AV 1 (RGB) – TV CENTER R FRONT AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) L Y AC IN PB DIGITAL OUT AC IN CONTROL IN OUTPUT R L OUT PR COAXIAL a Control cable b Coaxial cable IN G-LINK COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO VIDEO 1 2 Display cable 10 En ANTENNA S-VIDEO DVD Recorder (DVR-640H-AV/ DVR-440H-AV) Connecting up 4 For each terminal, press down on the tab to open; insert the wire, then release to secure. Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN jack on the rear of the DVD recorder. b. Plug the coaxial cable into the DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT (DVD/DVR 1) jack on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. 1 2 Plug the other end of the cable into the COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT jack on the rear of the DVD recorder. Note that unless the control cable is connected, you can’t use the remote control with the DVD recorder. 2 Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer. • Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the connector on the rear of the display unit. Plug the other end of the display cable into SYSTEM CONNECTOR jack on the receiver subwoofer. 3 Connect the AM and FM antennas 1. a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM antenna terminal2. English 1 Connect the DVD recorder to the receiver subwoofer. a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT jack on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. b. Push the FM antenna3 plug onto the center pin of the FM antenna socket. 5 Connect each speaker. • Each speaker cable has a color-coded connector at one end and two wires at the other end. Color-coded wire (Connect to speaker) Color-coded connector (Connect to rear panel) Assemble the AM loop antenna. a b c a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow. b. Clip the loop onto the stand. • Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire. • Connect the wires to the speaker. Match the colored wired with the color-coded label (model label), then insert the colored wire into the red (+) side and the other wire into the black (–) side. c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform step b after first securing the stand with screws. It is recommended that you determine the reception strength before securing the stand with the screws. Note 1 • Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and DVD recorder. • If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 29 or Connecting external antennas on page 34. 2 • Don’t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances. • The signal earth () is designed to reduce noise that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not an electrical safety earth. • If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal. • For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna. 3 • To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit. 11 En Connecting up Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW404) Surround right (Gray) Surround left (Blue) ANTENNA MCACC CONTROL IN SETUP MIC 6 FM UNBAL 75Ω CONTROL SPEAKERS OUT SUB WOOFER R SURROUND SYSTEM CONNECTOR L 5 AM LOOP ANTENNA AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT ANALOG DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 OPTICAL Listening position L R USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT CENTER R FRONT L AC IN Front right (Red) Center (Green) Front left (White) 8 To AC outlet Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW606) Surround right (Gray) Surround left (Blue) ANTENNA MCACC CONTROL IN SETUP MIC FM UNBAL 75Ω 6 CONTROL SPEAKERS SYSTEM CONNECTOR OUT SUB WOOFER R SURROUND L 5 AUDIO DIGITAL AM LOOP ANTENNA INPUT DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 OPTICAL ANALOG L R Listening position USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT CENTER R FRONT L Center (Green) AC IN 12 En Front right (Red) 8 To AC outlet Front left (White) Connecting up • Do not connect the supplied speakers to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in malfunction or fire. The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug should face up or down depending on whether it’s being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly. 7 English • Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system. • Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make sure to insert completely. Connect the DVD recorder to your TV. 1 • Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on your TV. Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for the video connection. Upper terminal 6 • Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV. Lower terminal Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/ video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. Connect the subwoofer cable. • Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of center, you should see the subwoofer connecting cable. Plug this into the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER terminal. 8 Connect the power cord.2 • Connect the power cords to AC inlets on the receiver subwoofer and DVD recorder. Caution Connect the power cords to a wall socket. • These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts. ANTENNA IN 7 AUDIO IN Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) VIDEO IN TV RF antenna cable DVD Recorder (DVR-640H-AV/DVR-440H-AV) ANTENNA IN AV 1 (RGB) – TV AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) Y AC IN PB DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN OUTPUT R L OUT PR COAXIAL IN G-LINK COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO ANTENNA ANTENNA OUT RF antenna cable 8 To AC outlet Antenna/cable TV wall outlet Note 1 Other types of video connection are possible. See page 51-page 54 for more information. 2 • Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system. • Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system. 13 En Connecting up Using this system for TV audio If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to this system and enjoy surround TV sound. SYSTEM CONNECTOR CONTROL SPEAKERS OUT SUB WOOFER R SURROUND AUDIO DIGITAL L INPUT DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 OPTICAL ANALOG L R USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT CENTER R FRONT L AC IN 1 AUDIO OUTPUT TV 1 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks on your TV to the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks on the receiver subwoofer. Use the red/white stereo audio cable (not supplied) for this connection. Make sure you match the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. • You can use the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks for any analog source you want, such as a tape deck, etc. 14 En Remote control Chapter 4 3 1 RECORDER RECEIVER HDD/DVD (page 78) Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for recording or playback. The receiver subwoofer’s audio input is also switched to DVD/DVR1.1 2 SOUND HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER 3 5 4 PAUSE PLAY STOP REC STOP REC HELP INFO 6 9 TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR HOME MENU GUIDE CHANNEL + 12 CM BACK PAUSE LIVE TV 13 15 17 19 NEXT AUDIO SUBTITLE / / SET UP 1 /ST– 22 RETURN 14 CHANNEL – PREV 4 MCACC 7 VOLUME ANGLE /TUNE+ 2 SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY 3 /ST+ 5 5 Playback controls (page 86) 18 20 PAUSE Press to pause playback or recording. 21 PLAY Press to start playback. /TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN SOUND STOP Press to stop playback. 24 9 8 TV/DVD 25 CLEAR SLEEP + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN 4 SOUND RETRIEVER Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio sources (page 27). 23 0 29 AUDIO IN (page 34) Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver subwoofer’s audio inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG). MENU 6 SURROUND ADVANCED 27 16 PLAY MODE TIMER REC REC MODE ENTER FM/AM (page 29) Press to select the built-in radio tuner. 7 8 10 11 CM SKIP ENTER Input select buttons English Remote control SUB JUKE BOX 26 6 Recording controls (page 78) DISPLAY 28 RDS DISP AXD7442 OPENOPEN REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE Plus+™ screen, use for One-Button-Record. STOP REC Press to stop recording. Important • Functions printed in green on the remote control are accessed by switching the MAIN/SUB switch to SUB. 7 INFO Press to see additional information for the highlighted item in GUIDE Plus+™. 1 RECORDER Press to switch the recorder on or into standby. 8 HELP Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen. 2 RECEIVER Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on or into standby. 9 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 89, 96) / TOP MENU (page 87) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/RW (Video) disc is loaded. Note 1 If the recorder is set to remote mode 2 or 3, the receiver subwoofer’s audio input will not be switched. See also Remote Control Mode on page 134. 15 En Remote control 10 GUIDE Press to display the GUIDE Plus+™ screen; press again to exit. 11 HOME MENU Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate many the functions of the system. 18 TIMER REC (page 65) Press to set a timer recording from the GUIDE Plus+™ system. 12 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to navigate all DVD recorder on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 19 / (page 91) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. CHANNEL +/– (page 77) Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the audio or video playing. CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the audio or video playing. 13 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 79) Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast. 14 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. 15 PREV / NEXT Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/track/ folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the previous/next page. 16 VOLUME +/– Use to adjust the volume. 17 GUIDE Plus+™ Action buttons and DVD playback function buttons When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, these buttons act as the Red, Green, Yellow and Blue Action buttons (the functions of these buttons change according to the GUIDE Plus+™ Area). (page 64) AUDIO (page 77, 94) Press to change the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) SUBTITLE (page 93) Press to display/change the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ANGLE (page 94) Press to switch camera angles on discs with multiangle scenes. 16 En PLAY MODE (page 91) Press to change the play mode (search, repeat, program play, etc.) /, / (page 91) While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the previous/next day. 20 REC MODE (page 77) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). 21 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 106) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 22 Number buttons Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on. /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER Use to control receiver functions. SETUP Use to access the menu system for surround sound setup, tuner settings and so on (page 23, 29, 30, 31, 37). SR+ Use to setup the SR+ features and to select the SR+ mode (page 36). MCACC Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 23). TEST TONE Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 32). SURROUND Use to select a Surround mode (page 25). SLEEP Press to set the sleep timer (page 37). ADVANCED Use to select a Pioneer original surround mode (page 26). Remote control • Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the display unit, as shown. CLEAR Press to clear an entry and start again. 30 30 23 MENU (page 87) Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded. When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, use to jump directly to the Menu bar. 24 VIDEO IN (page 82) Press to change the DVD recorder input for recording and playback. 25 TV/DVD Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’, in which you get picture and sound from the system’s tuner (or an external input). English SOUND (page 27) Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust bass and treble, etc. 7m Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. 2 Insert two AA/R6 batteries into the battery compartment following the indications (,) inside the compartment. 26 JUKEBOX (page 113) Press to display the Jukebox screen of the DVD recorder, from where you can copy music to the HDD for playback. 27 TV CONTROL (page 136) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. 28 DISPLAY (page 95) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. RDS DISP Changes RDS displays (page 30). 29 MAIN/SUB Change from MAIN to SUB to access the green functions/commands on the remote. Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: 3 Close the cover. Caution Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: • Don’t mix new and old batteries together. • Don’t use different kinds of battery together— although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. • Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. • Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. • Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to be used for a month or more. • Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s remote sensor. • When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area. • Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. • Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. • When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 134. WARNING • Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. 17 En Before you start Chapter 5 Before you start Switching on The DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver subwoofer is located on the display unit. Remote control RECORDER RECEIVER SOUND HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER PAUSE PLAY STOP REC STOP REC HELP INFO TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR HOME MENU GUIDE CHANNEL + CM BACK CM SKIP ENTER PAUSE LIVE TV RETURN CHANNEL – PREV NEXT AUDIO SUBTITLE / / SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 VOLUME ANGLE Display unit PLAY MODE TIMER REC REC MODE /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY 3 /ST+ MENU 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN 8 SURROUND ADVANCED 9 SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX 0 SLEEP INPUT + + CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN SUB – VOLUME + AUDIO INPUT SURROUND STANDBY/ON DISPLAY RDS DISP AXD7442 DVD Recorder (DVR-640H-AV) OPEN/CLOSE HDD/DVD STANDBY/ON USB DV IN The table below shows what needs to be switched on for various system functions: Function 18 En Display unit DVD recorder DVD playback On On CD playback On On HDD playback On On Radio On Off Timer recording Off On S-VIDEO – CH + ONE TOUCH COPY STOP REC REC VIDEO L AUDIO R (MONO) INPUT Setting up After connecting and installing the DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set the system up for use. DVD recorder • Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 59). Receiver subwoofer • Switch off the display demo mode (page 23). • Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the surround sound (page 23). Before you start 7 Press (play) to start playback. This manual is split into to parts, one covering using the receiver subwoofer, the other using the DVD recorder. Below are some common operations and where to find them explained in this manual. Watching a DVD Remember that when using the remote to control the DVD recorder, you should point the remote towards the display unit, not the recorder itself. Press to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing . (Press again to cancel the resume function.) English Basic operation Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. See Basic playback on page 86 for more on playing discs. RECORDER RECEIVER SOUND HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER PAUSE PLAY REC STOP REC HELP INFO CM BACK Adjust the volume. 9 Adjust the sound using the surround effects See Listening to your system on page 25 for details. STOP TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR 8 HOME MENU GUIDE CHANNEL + CM SKIP ENTER PAUSE LIVE TV RETURN Listening to a CD 1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer). 2 Switch on the DVD recorder. 3 Press HDD/DVD. 4 Load a CD and start playback (page 88). 5 Adjust the volume. CHANNEL – PREV NEXT AUDIO SUBTITLE / / SET UP /TUNE+ VOLUME ANGLE 6 Adjust the sound using the surround effects (page 25). PLAY MODE Watching a title recorded on the HDD TIMER REC REC MODE SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY 1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer). Switch on the DVD recorder. 1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer). 2 2 Switch on the DVD recorder. 3 Switch on your TV. 4 Press HDD/DVD. 5 Start playback of the HDD title (page 87). 6 Adjust the volume. 3 Switch on your TV. Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 4 Press HDD/DVD. 5 Press OPEN/CLOSE on the DVD recorder to open the disc tray. 6 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play face-down). 7 Adjust the sound using the surround effects (page 25). Listening to the radio 1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer). 2 Tune to a station (page 29). 3 Adjust the volume. 4 Adjust the sound using the surround effects (page 25). 19 En SX-SW606 SX-SW404 S-ST606 S-ST404 20 En Section Two 01 Controls and displays 07 Additional information Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTS CD setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the sleep timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tuner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 Getting started System demo setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 03 Listening to your system Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Front Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . Enhancing dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . . Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 25 25 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 27 28 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 38 39 39 40 40 English Contents 04 Listening to the radio Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying RDS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 30 05 Surround sound settings Using the Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual mono setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone . . . 31 31 31 32 32 32 06 Other connections Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting an analog audio component. . . . . . . . Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . . SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays . . . . . . . . Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 34 34 34 35 35 36 21 En Controls and displays 01 Chapter 1 Controls and displays Display unit – VOLUME + AUDIO INPUT SURROUND STANDBY/ON 1 2 3 1 STANDBY/ON Press to switch the system on/into standby. 4 5 6 4 AUDIO INPUT (page 34) Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG). 2 Front panel display See below for details. 5 SURROUND Use to select a Surround mode (page 25). 3 VOLUME buttons Use to adjust the volume. 6 IR remote sensor (page 17) Display 1 2 3 SOUND DTS F.SURR. 2D 2PL 9 8 kHz MHz 7 6 5 1 DTS Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 25). 2 5 kHz / MHz Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character display (kHz for AM, MHz for FM). SURR. Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 26). 6 Tuner indicators – Lights when a broadcast is being received. – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode. – Lights when FM mono reception is selected. 22 En – Lights when in one of the RDS display or search modes. F.SURR. (RCS-404H/505H only) Lights when one of the Front Surround listening modes is selected (page 26). 3 SOUND Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 27). 4 4 Character display 7 Lights when sleep timer is active (page 37). 8 2 PL II Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 25). 9 2D Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 25). Getting started 02 Chapter 2 English Getting started Important • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB. System demo setting Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this starts when you plug in for the first time). SURROUND ADVANCED AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE / SETUP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 2 + + CHANNEL VOLUME – – SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY 3 /ST+ JUKE BOX INPUT TV CONTROL RDS DISP MENU 6 MAIN SUB 8 AXD7442 9 SOUND Important DISPLAY /TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN SURROUND ADVANCED 1 TIMER REC REC MODE TV/DVD CLEAR The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided, the system uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization (Acoustic Calibration EQ) for your particular room.1 0 PLAY MODE SLEEP / SOUND Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound TV/DVD • The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud; however, do not turn the volume down during setup as this may result in a sub-optimal setup. • Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the MCACC setup. Switch the system into standby. Press SETUP. 3 Use the / buttons to select DEMO from the menu, then press ENTER. 4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then press ENTER. Select from: • DEMO ON – Switches the demo display on. / RECORDER RECEIVER 4 MCACC PLAY STOP REC STOP REC HELP TOP MENU DISC 7 CLEAR SLEEP SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY 2 3 5 6 /ST– SOUND HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER 0 TIMER REC REC MODE /TUNE+ 1 PAUSE / /ST+ + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – MENU TV CONTROL JUKE BOX DISPLAY RDS DISP /TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN 8 9 SURROUND ADVANCED MAIN SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX SUB AXD7442 0 INFO SLEEP HOME MENU + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME DISPLAY 1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the rear panel. • DEMO OFF – Switches the demo display off and the system into standby. ANTENNA MCACC CONTROL IN SETUP MIC FM UNBAL 75Ω SYSTEM CONNECTOR CONTROL SPEAKERS OUT SUB WOOFER R SURROUND L AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL) AM LOOP ANTENNA ANALOG L R USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT CENTER R FRONT L AC IN 2 Place the microphone at your normal listening position. Place the mic horizontally about ear level at your normal listening position using a table or chair. Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. Note 1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout). 23 En 02 Getting started 3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press RECEIVER to turn the power on. 4 Press MCACC. Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC. The volume increases automatically and the system outputs a series of test tones. • To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished, press MCACC. The unit will continue to use the previous settings. • If the ambient noise level is too high, NOISY blinks in the display for five seconds. To exit and check the noise levels1, press MCACC, or to try again, press ENTER when RETRY shows in the display. • If you see an ERR MIC or ERR SP message in the display, there may be a problem with your mic or the speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER when you see RETRY2 When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level returns to normal, COMPLETE3 shows in the display, and Acoustic Calibration EQ is activated.4 Note 1 • If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. • Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup. 2 If this doesn’t work, press MCACC, turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the ERR message, then try the Auto MCACC setup again. 3 If COMPLETE doesn’t appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again. 4 See Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 27 to switch on/off Acoustic Calibration EQ. 24 En Listening to your system 03 Chapter 3 Important • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB. • Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode. • You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. English Listening to your system The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source that’s playing. Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. RCS-404H/RCS-505H only: If you set up the system for Front surround (page 7), the Front Surround modes will give the best results (see Using Front Surround on page 26). MCACC /TUNE 7 8 TEST TONE VIDEO IN 9 SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX 0 SLEEP + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN DISPLAY If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D or DTS indicator lights. • AUTO – Auto listening mode (see above) • DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic) – 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source • MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) – 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources, for use with any two-channel source • MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) – 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources, for use with any two-channel source; see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below • STEREO – See Listening in stereo on page 26 RDS DISP SUB AXD7442 • Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening mode. If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D or DTS indicator lights. • You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC Listening in surround sound You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic decoding modes. RCS-404H/RCS-505H only: If you set up the system for Front surround (page 7), the Front Surround modes will give the best results (see Using Front Surround on page 26). MCACC /TUNE 7 8 TEST TONE VIDEO IN SURROUND ADVANCED 9 SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX 0 SLEEP + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN SUB DISPLAY RDS DISP 7 /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – 3 /ST+ TV CONTROL MENU DISPLAY RDS DISP 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN 8 9 ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX MAIN SUB AXD7442 0 SLEEP + + 1 With Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press SOUND. 2 Use / to select C WIDTH, DIMEN. or PANORAMA then press ENTER. • C WIDTH (Center Width): Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings) • DIMEN. (Dimension): Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings) AXD7442 25 En 03 Listening to your system • PANORAMA: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect. 3 Use / to adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm. RCS-404H/RCS-505H only: If you set up the system for Front surround (page 7), the Front Surround modes will give the best results (see Using Front Surround above). 7 8 9 SURROUND ADVANCED + + CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL The Front Surround modes are effective when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as described on page 7. The surround speakers should be placed beside the front speakers and oriented either towards the walls, or straight ahead, depending on which mode you are using (see below). 8 SURROUND ADVANCED TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL SUB MAIN DISPLAY RDS DISP SUB AXD7442 • Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround mode. Press repeatedly to select: • ADVMOVIE – Suitable for movies • ADVMUSIC – Suitable for music 9 SOUND • EXPANDED – Wide sound field 0 SLEEP MAIN JUKE BOX INPUT RCS-404H/RCS-505H only 7 TV/DVD CLEAR 0 SLEEP Using Front Surround SOUND • TV SURR. – Surround sound for mono or stereo TV broadcasts DISPLAY • SPORTS – Suitable for sports programming RDS DISP • GAME – Suitable for TV game units AXD7442 • Press ADVANCED to select a Front Surround mode. Press repeatedly to select FRTMOVIE, FRTMUSIC or EXTPOWER. • If you have selected FRTMOVIE (Front Surround Movie) or FRTMUSIC (Front Surround Music), turn each surround speaker so that the guide markers on the stand base are lined up horizontally in the direction the listening position (see below). With EXTPOWER (Extra Power), the surround speakers should point in the same direction as the front speakers (see below). • VIRTUAL – A virtual surround effect using just the subwoofer and front speakers. • 5 STEREO – Powerful surround sound for stereo music sources Listening in stereo You can listen to any source—stereo or multichannel—in stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer. MCACC /TUNE 7 8 TEST TONE VIDEO IN SURROUND ADVANCED 9 SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX 0 SLEEP + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC EXTPOWER Using Advanced Surround The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects. 26 En SUB DISPLAY RDS DISP AXD7442 • Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display. • You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode. Listening to your system When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression. 3 Use the / buttons to switch EQ ON or EQ OFF then press ENTER to confirm. • On the EQ OFF setting, equalization is set to off and speaker settings (channel delay and channel level) remains as it is set. • Acoustic Calibration EQ is set to on automatically after Auto MCACC setup is used. English Using the Sound Retriever 03 Enhancing dialogue Tip • This feature is effective when used together with the Jukebox function of the DVD recorder. The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie sound track. 1 RECORDER RECEIVER SOUND HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER PAUSE PLAY STOP REC STOP REC HELP INFO • While listening to a stereo source, press SOUND RETRIEVER . Press repeatedly to switch between: • RTRV ON — Switches the Sound Retriever on. • RTRV OFF — Switches the Sound Retriever off. Press SOUND. 2 Use the / buttons to select DIALOGUE then press ENTER. 3 Use the / buttons to select the amount dialogue enhancement then press ENTER to confirm. Select between OFF, MID or MAX. Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source. The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels. Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration EQ set in Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound on page 23. / / TIMER REC REC MODE SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY SET UP 1 2 4 7 6 TEST TONE VIDEO IN 8 9 SLEEP Adjusting the bass and treble Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone. TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX 1 DISPLAY 2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press ENTER. + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL 1 3 Use the / buttons to select QUIET or MIDNIGHT then press ENTER to confirm. • To cancel the Quiet or Midnight listening modes, select BASS/TRE. SOUND 0 SUB 2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press ENTER. MENU 5 SURROUND ADVANCED MAIN Press SOUND. 3 ENTER MCACC 1 RDS DISP AXD7442 Press SOUND. 2 Use the / buttons to select MCACC EQ then press ENTER. Press SOUND. 3 Use the / buttons to select BASS/TRE then press ENTER. • Selecting BASS/TRE cancels the Quiet and Midnight listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the same time. 4 Use the / buttons to select BASS or TREBLE; use the / buttons to adjust the sound then press ENTER to confirm. 27 En Listening to your system 03 Boosting the bass level There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the bass in a source. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the / buttons to select BASSMODE then press ENTER. 3 Use the / buttons to select the sound then press ENTER to confirm. Select between OFF, MUSIC or CINEMA. 28 En Listening to the radio 04 Chapter 4 • Manual tuning: Press TUNE +/– repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. Important • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB. • Auto tuning: Press and hold TUNE +/– until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching. • High-speed tuning: Press and hold TUNE +/– until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have to manually tune in every time you want to listen. RECORDER SOUND HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER PAUSE PLAY REC STOP REC HELP INFO STOP TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR HOME MENU GUIDE CHANNEL + CM BACK CM SKIP ENTER PAUSE LIVE TV RETURN CHANNEL – PREV NEXT AUDIO SUBTITLE / / SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 VOLUME ANGLE PLAY MODE English Listening to the radio Improving poor FM reception If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. 1 Tune to an FM radio station then press SETUP. 2 Use the / buttons to choose FM MODE then press ENTER. 3 Use the / buttons to select FM MONO then press ENTER. The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM AUTO above to switch back to auto-stereo mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). TIMER REC REC MODE /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY 3 /ST+ MENU 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN 8 SURROUND ADVANCED 9 SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX Improving poor AM sound The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched off. Also try changing the position and direction of the AM loop antenna. 0 SLEEP + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – DISPLAY TV CONTROL MAIN SUB AXD7442 Changing the noise cut mode If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best. 1 1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the FM or AM band. The display shows the band and frequency. Tune to an AM radio station then press SETUP. 2 Use the / buttons to choose NOISECUT then press ENTER. 3 Use the / buttons to select a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER. 2 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modes—manual, auto, and highspeed: 29 En Listening to the radio 04 Memorizing stations Displaying RDS information You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. You can display the different types of RDS information available.2 SET UP 1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station. For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset. 2 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 Press SETUP. INPUT 2 Use the ST +/– buttons to select a station preset. NEWS – News AFFAIRS – Current Affairs INFO – General Information SPORT – Sport EDUCATE – Educational DRAMA – Radio plays, etc. CULTURE – National or regional culture, theater, etc. SCIENCE – Science and technology VARIED – Usually talk-based material, such as quiz shows or interviews. POP M – Pop music ROCK M – Rock music EASY M – Easy listening LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical music CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical music OTHER M – Music not fitting above categories WEATHER – Weather reports FINANCE – Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc. CHILDREN – Programs for children SOCIAL – Social affairs RELIGION – Programs concerning religion PHONE IN – Public expressing their views by phone TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel rather than traffic announcements LEISURE – Leisure interests and hobbies JAZZ – Jazz COUNTRY – Country music NATION M – Popular music in a language other than English OLDIES – Popular music from the ’50s and ’60s FOLK M – Folk music DOCUMENT – Documentary 3 /ST+ MENU 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN 8 9 ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX + + CHANNEL VOLUME – – SUB DISPLAY RDS DISP AXD7442 • Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station. For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone number as RT. • Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio station. Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of information—the name of the station and the kind of show they’re broadcasting, for example. You can search the following program types:1 SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY • Press RDS DISP for RDS information. Each press changes the display as follows: Using RDS One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program. For example, you can search for a station that’s broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ. 5 TV CONTROL MAIN Make sure the tuner function is selected. ENTER SLEEP 4 Use the / buttons to select the station preset you want then press ENTER. 1 2 0 3 Use the / buttons to choose ST.MEM. then press ENTER. Listening to station presets /TUNE+ • Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast. • SEARCH – PTY search (see below) • Current tuner frequency Searching for RDS programs You can search for a program type listed above. 1 Press the FM/AM button for the FM band.3 2 Press RDS DISP repeatedly until SEARCH appears in the display. 3 Use the / buttons to select the program type you want to hear. 4 Press ENTER to start the search. The system searches the station presets for a match. If it finds one, searching stops for 5 sec. 5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press ENTER within the 5 seconds. If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes. Note 1 In addition, there are three other program types, TEST, ALARM, and NO TYPE. ALARM and TEST are used for emergency announcements. You can’t search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot be found. 2 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly. • If you see NO DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed). • In the PTY display, NO DATA or NO TYPE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds. 3 RDS is only possible in the FM band. 30 En Surround sound settings 05 Chapter 5 1 Select stereo or multichannel playback for a source. Important • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB. 2 English Surround sound settings Press SETUP. 3 Use the / buttons to select CH LEVEL, then press ENTER. Using the Setup menu From the Setup menu you can access all the surround sound settings of the system1, including channel levels, speaker distances, dynamic range adjustment and dual mono audio playback. 4 Use / to select a channel; / to adjust the level of that channel. • You can adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB. • If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, or a stereo source is playing in Auto mode, you will not be able to adjust the center or surround channels. Use the following buttons to use the Setup menu. / / 5 TIMER REC REC MODE SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY SETUP 1 2 3 ENTER 4 7 MENU 5 6 TEST TONE VIDEO IN MCACC 8 SURROUND ADVANCED 9 SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX 0 SLEEP + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN SUB Press ENTER when you’re finished. • If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. DISPLAY RDS DISP AXD7442 Speaker distance setting The Auto MCACC feature (see page 23) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the speaker distance settings you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. Set the distance of each speaker from your normal listening position. 1 Channel level setting The Auto MCACC feature (see page 23) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can improve the surround sound in your listening room. 2 Use the / buttons to select DISTANCE, then press ENTER. 3 Use / to select a speaker; / to adjust the distance. Adjust the following speakers: This method of setting the channel levels allows you to listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo playback are independent of the settings for surround sound playback. A further method of setting the channel levels is to use the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone on page 32 for more on this. Press SETUP. • L – Front left speaker • C – Center speaker • R – Front right speaker • SR – Surround right speaker • SL – Surround left speaker • SW – Subwoofer Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.3 m to 9.0 m. 4 Press ENTER when you’re finished. • If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. Note 1 There are other settings you can adjust from the Setup menu; these are explained in Listening to the radio on page 29 and Additional information on page 37. 31 En Surround sound settings 05 Dynamic Range Control1 When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low volume, low level sounds—including some of the dialog—can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks. Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks. 1 Press SETUP. 2 Use the / buttons to select DRC, then press ENTER. 3 Use / to select a setting. Select one of the following: Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see Channel level setting on page 31). A test tone is played through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the level as it plays. Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources are independent of the settings for surround sound sources. / / TIMER REC REC MODE /TUNE+ 1 2 SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY 3 ENTER • DRC OFF (default) – No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) • DRC MID – Mid setting • DRC HIGH – Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) 4 Press ENTER to exit. 4 MCACC 7 5 MENU 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN 8 SURROUND ADVANCED 9 SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX 0 SLEEP + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN SUB DISPLAY RDS DISP AXD7442 Dual mono setting2 Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with bilingual audio. 1 Press SETUP. 1 Press SURROUND to select the Auto listening mode. • If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two channel) playback, select the STEREO listening mode. 2 Use the / buttons to select DUALMONO, then press ENTER. 2 Press TEST TONE. The test tone is output from each speaker in turn. 3 Use / to select a setting. Select one of the following: 3 While a test tone is playing, use the / buttons to adjust that channel level. The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB. • CH1 MONO (default) – Only channel 1 is played • CH2 MONO – Only channel 2 is played • CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the front speakers 4 Press ENTER to exit. • You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output using the VOLUME +/– buttons (this does not affect the channel level settings). • If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, you will not be able to adjust the center or surround channels. • Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening to a source. See the method described in Channel level setting on page 31. Note 1 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see Audio DRC on page 131. 2 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see Switching audio channels on page 94. 32 En Surround sound settings English 4 When you’re done, press ENTER to exit test tone setup. • If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here. 05 33 En 06 Other connections Chapter 6 Other connections Important • When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket. RECORDER RECEIVER SOUND HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER PAUSE PLAY REC STOP REC HELP INFO STOP TOP MENU Connecting auxiliary components This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to connect external components, such as your MD or CD recorder. 1 If the system isn’t already on, press RECEIVER to switch on. Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on. 2 Use the AUDIO IN button to select an audio input source. ANTENNA DVD/DVR1 MCACC CONTROL IN SETUP MIC FM UNBAL 75Ω CONTROL SPEAKERS SYSTEM CONNECTOR OUT SUB WOOFER R SURROUND L AM LOOP ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL) ANALOG ANALOG DVD/DVR2 DIGITAL L R USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT CENTER R FRONT L 3 If necessary, start playback of the external source. AC IN DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) CD recorder, etc. • Connect the DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) or DIGITAL (OPTICAL) jack on the rear panel to the optical output of an external playback component. These include digital components such as an MD player, digital satellite, or a game system. Connecting an analog audio component You can use the ANALOG input jacks to connect an analog audio component, such as a tape player. See Using this system for TV audio on page 14 for connection details (this explains connecting the audio output from your TV, but any analog audio component can be connected). Listening to an external audio source You can connect both analog and digital external audio sources to this system. Digital audio sources include digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog sources include your TV. See also Connecting auxiliary components above. 34 En Connecting external antennas For an external AM antenna, use 5–6 meters of vinylinsulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the loop antenna connected. Outdoor antenna Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated wire) 5–6m AM LOOP ANTENNA Other connections 06 • Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the CONTROL IN jack of this unit (through a media receiver, if applicable) to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma display.3 Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need to make a few settings in the unit—see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays below. English For an external FM antenna, Use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna. ANTENNA PAL connector SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays Make the following settings if you have connected a Pioneer plasma display to this unit using an SR+ cable. Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display / / TIMER REC REC MODE SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY SET UP 1 If you have a Pioneer plasma display1, you can use an SR+ cable2 to connect it to this unit and take advantage of various convenient features, such as controlling this unit via the plasma display’s remote sensor, automatic video input switching of the plasma display, display unit messages appearing on the plasma display screen, and automatic volume muting on the plasma display. 2 3 ENTER 4 6 TEST TONE VIDEO IN MCACC 7 MENU 5 8 SURROUND ADVANCED 9 SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX 0 SLEEP + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN SUB DISPLAY RDS DISP AXD7442 Media receiver 1 CONTROL OUT Pioneer plasma display ANTENNA MCACC CONTROL IN SETUP MIC FM UNBAL 75Ω SYSTEM CONNECTOR CONTROL SPEAKERS OUT SUB WOOFER R SURROUND L AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL) AM LOOP ANTENNA Press SR+. 2 Use the / buttons to choose SETUP, then press ENTER. 3 Use the / buttons to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. ANALOG L 4 Use the / buttons to adjust the setting. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make other settings. R USE ONLY WITH DISPLAY UNIT CENTER R FRONT L AC IN 6 When you’re done, press ENTER to leave the SR+ setup menu. Important • With an SR+ cable connected, the remote must now be pointed towards your plasma display rather than the display unit of the receiver subwoofer in order to control the receiver subwoofer. Note 1 This system is compatible with all Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward. 2 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for more information on obtaining an SR+ cable. 3 You won’t be able to use the remote sensor of this unit with the CONTROL IN jack of this unit connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma display. You can use the remote sensor of the plasma display (even in standby) as long as the power isn’t switched off. 35 En 06 Other connections Automatic plasma display volume muting When Volume Control is switched on, the volume of the plasma display is automatically muted when the receiver subwoofer is switched on, or the receiver subwoofer function is changed to one that you would want to hear the sound from the receiver subwoofer rather than the plasma display (DVD, for example). • VOL.C ON – When this unit is switched on, or the input function is changed, the volume on the plasma display is muted so only sound from this unit is heard. • VOL.C OFF – This unit does not control the volume of the plasma display Automatic plasma display input switching In order that the plasma display can switch automatically to the correct input when you switch the input function of the receiver subwoofer, you need to tell it how your system is connected. For example, if you connected your DVD recorder to the DV1 input on the receiver subwoofer, and to input 2 on your plasma display, select the DV1 PDP2 setting here so that when you switch the input function of the receiver subwoofer to DV1 to watch your DVD recorder, the plasma display will automatically switch to input 2. For each receiver subwoofer input function (DV1 (DVD/ DVR1), DV2 (DVD/DVR2), DIG (DIGITAL), ANA (ANALOG)) you can select: • NONE – does not switch the plasma display input • PDP1 to PDP5 – switches the plasma display input to one of the numbered inputs (1 to 5) • TVTN – switches the plasma display to its built-in TV tuner Note • The number of video inputs available will depend on the plasma display you’ve connected. • The PDP5 input may be called ‘PC Input’ (or similar) on your plasma display. • The SR+ setting remains in effect even in standby. • The SR+ setting does not affect the FM/AM tuner function. 36 En Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display 1 2 Press SR+ on the remote. Use / to select SR+ ON then press ENTER. • The SR+ setting is maintained even after switching the receiver subwoofer into standby then back on. Automatic muting and automatic input switching will be effective when the receiver subwoofer is switched on. • If you disconnect the SR+ cable or switch the plasma display off while SR+ is on, the SR+ ON setting remains. • To switch to SR+ OFF, follow steps 1 and 2, selecting SR+ OFF. Note • You can control this unit with the plasma display’s remote sensor even in standby, but you can’t control this unit with either this unit’s remote sensor or the plasma display’s remote sensor when the plasma display is switched off (AC off) and the SR+ cable is connected to the CONTROL IN jack of this unit. Additional information 07 Chapter 7 • DTS-CD – Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but note that the beginning of regular CD tracks may be skipped. Important • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB. / / TIMER REC REC MODE SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY SETUP 1 2 MENU 5 SURROUND ADVANCED 6 8 SURROUND ADVANCED SLEEP 9 SOUND TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX INPUT 0 + + INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME – – TV CONTROL MAIN SUB TV/DVD CLEAR JUKE BOX AXD7442 MAIN 2 Use the / buttons to select DIMMER then press ENTER. If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change this setting to hear the decoded signal. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SETUP. 3 Use the / buttons to select CD TYPE from the menu, then press ENTER. CHANNEL VOLUME – – SUB DISPLAY RDS DISP AXD7442 1 Press the SLEEP button to select an option. Choose between the following options: • SLP ON – Switches off after about an hour • SLP OFF – Cancels the sleep timer After selecting SLP ON, you can press SLEEP again to check how much time is left. Each line indicates approximately 12 minutes (remaining): SLP - - - - - 3 Use the / buttons to select LIGHT or DARK then press ENTER. DTS CD setting + The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it.2 You can choose to dim the display if you find it too bright.1 Press SETUP. + TV CONTROL DISPLAY RDS DISP Dimming the display 1 SOUND 0 TEST TONE VIDEO IN MCACC 7 Setting the sleep timer 3 ENTER 4 English Additional information Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default. 1 Switch the system on. 2 Press and hold SURROUND then press the STANDBY/ON button on the display unit. The next time you switch on, all the system settings should be reset. 4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then press ENTER. Select from: • NORMAL – Use for playback of regular audio CDs. Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when played. Note 1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting. 2 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. The DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer. 37 En 07 Additional information Don’t... Installation and maintenance Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location: Do... Use in a well-ventilated room. Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference—especially if the television uses an indoor antenna. Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this may prevent proper cooling of the system unit. Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unit’s feet. Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. • If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. • If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the DVR-640H-AV/DVR-440H-AV DVD recorder, try setting the recorder’s audio-related settings back to their defaults—see The Initial Setup menu on page 128. General 38 En Problem Remedy The power does not turn on, or switches off suddenly (an error message may be displayed at startup). • Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on. • Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the system to shut off automatically. • Check that the speakers are connected correctly. • Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer. • Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model. • Try reducing the volume level. • If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. No sound is output when a function is selected. • If you’re playing from the DVD recorder, make sure that the digital coaxial cable is connected properly. Also make sure that the DVD recorder’s Digital Out and DTS Out settings are set to On, and that the MPEG Out setting is set to MPEG PCM. • If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 34). • Turn up the volume. No sound from surround or center speakers. • Refer to Channel level setting on page 31 to check the speaker levels. • Check that you haven’t selected the AUTO, STEREO, or VIRTUAL mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 25). • Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up). • If you’re playing from the DVD recorder, check that the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. • If the source is 96 kHz, this will be played in stereo. If you want to play it in surround sound, set the DVD recorder’s 96 kHz PCM Out setting to 96 kHz 48 kHz. Additional information Problem 07 Remedy English Can’t operate using the remote • Replace the batteries (Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 17). control. • Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor (Using the remote control on page 17). • Remove any obstacles or operate from another position. • Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. • For operating the DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and coaxial cable are connected. (page 10) • If the receiver subwoofer is connected to a Pioneer plasma display with an SR+ cable, check that the plasma display is switched on. Point the remote control at the plasma display in order to operate the receiver subwoofer. • Check that nothing is mistakenly plugged into the CONTROL IN jack. Tuner Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. • Connect the AM antenna (refer to the Connecting up) and adjust the direction and position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 34). • Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 34). • Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away. Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. • The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. Error Messages Message Description 2CH ONLY • An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the current source is a multichannel source. 96K • An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital. EXIT • Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity. NOISY • Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully. ERR MIC • An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is not connected properly. ERR SP • An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are not connected properly. EEP ERROR • Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. NO SPTYP • Try switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please contact a Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer. 39 En 07 Additional information Glossary Dolby Digital Dolby Pro Logic II DTS Specifications A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. A matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories that expands any two-channel source audio, such as CDs and TV broadcasts, to a five-channel playback (left/center/right/left surround/right surround), resulting in a surround experience. A multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Digital Theater Systems that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. SX-SW606 / SX-SW404 • Amplifier section RMS Power Output: Front, Center, Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω) Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω) • FM tuner section Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω, unbalanced • AM tuner section Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 kHz to 1 602 kHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna • Subwoofer section Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex floor type System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz Maximum Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W • Miscellaneous Power requirements . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W Dimensions . . . . . 200 mm (W) x 375 mm (H) x 437 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg • Accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) . . . . . . . . . 2 Coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 These operating instructions 40 En Additional information 07 S-ST606 Speaker system • (Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speaker x1) Speaker cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Non-skid pads (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Speaker stands (for surround speakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Screws (for stands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Front/surround speakers Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box floorstanding type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-way system Speakers: Woofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type x 2 Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6 cm semi-dome type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . 260 mm (W) x 1095 mm (H) x 260 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 kg • English • Accessories Note • Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. Center speaker Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . . 270 mm (W) x 96 mm (H) x 90 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.78 kg • Accessories Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Non-skid pads (small). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Speaker stand bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Screws (for bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 S-ST404 Speaker system (Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speaker x1) • Front/surround speakers Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . 100 mm (W) x 136 mm (H) x 80 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg • Center speaker Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Hz to 20 kHz Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W Dimensions . . . . . . . 270 mm (W) x 96 mm (H) x 90 mm (D) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.78 kg 41 En DVD RECORDER DVR-640H-AV DVR-440H-AV 42 En Section Three 01 Before you start Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 45 About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Symbols used in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . . 84 Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 07 Playback Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Easy connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Using other types of audio/video output. . . . . . . . . . . 52 Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Connecting an external decoder box (1). . . . . . . . . . . 53 Connecting an external decoder box (2). . . . . . . . . . . 54 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Basic playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Playing in slow motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Displaying disc information on-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 95 03 Controls and displays 08 Editing Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 04 Getting started 09 Copying and backup Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system. . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 02 Connecting up 05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide The GUIDE Plus+™ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 GUIDE Plus+™ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 73 06 Recording About DVD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . . 77 Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Pause Live TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) . 82 Recording from an external component. . . . . . . . . . . 82 Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 English Contents 10 Using the Jukebox Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Copying files from a USB device to the HDD . . . . . . 113 Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Editing Jukebox albums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 11 The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Importing files from a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . 118 Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 12 The PhotoViewer (DVR-440H-AV) Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 43 En Section Three 13 The Disc Setup menu Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Initialize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 14 The Video Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . .126 15 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Selecting other languages for language options. . . .135 16 Additional information Setting up the remote to control your TV. . . . . . . . . .136 TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 On-screen displays and recorder displays. . . . . . . . .143 About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 44 En Before you start 01 Chapter 1 English Before you start Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs. Disc / content format playback compatibility Compatible media The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’ limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs. • DVD-RW ver. 1.1/1 x / 1 x to 2 x, ver. 1.2 / 2 x to 4 x / 2 x to 6 x Model • DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1 x / 1 x to 4 x / 1 x to 8 x / 1 x to 16 x, ver. 2.1 / 1 x to 8 x / 1 x to 16 x Playable 1,2,3 DVR-7000 • DVD+RW 1 x to 2.4 x / 1 x to 4 x / 3.3 x to 8 x Yes Yes1 DVR-3100 / DVR-5100H • DVD+R 1 x to 2.4 x / 1 x to 4 x / 1 x to 8 x / 1 x to 16 x • DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2 x, ver. 2.1 / 2 x / 2 x to 3 x / 2 x to 5 x, ver. 2.2 / 2 x / 2 x to 3 x / 2 x to 5 x Recordable No No 1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. 2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. 3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. • DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2 x to 4 x • DVD+R DL 2.4 x / 2.4 x to 8 x DVD/HDD Recording and playback compatibility This recorder can play and record all the currently popular DVD disc types, as well as providing HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types. HDD Marks used in this manual HDD DVD-R DVD (VR) DVD-RW DVD (Video) *1 DVD (VR) DVD (Video) *1 *2 DVD+R DVD +RW DVD-RAM DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM *13, 16 Logos Re-recordable / Erasable *3 *3 *3 *14 Editing of recorded programs *4 *4 *4 *4 Recording of Copy-once protected material *12 Playback in other players/recorders n/a *5 Chase play 16:9 and 4:3 program recording Bilingual broadcast recording of both audio channels *10, 11 *12 *6 *7 *12 *6 *6, 15 *8 *9 *11 *11 *11 45 En 01 Before you start Notes to table About DualDisc playback *1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 123) *2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 123) *3 Erasable, but free space does not increase *4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing *5 Must be compatible with DVD-R(VR) playback *6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units) (page 84) *7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW(VR) playback *8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback *9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback *10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (page 133) *11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM *12 CPRM-compatible discs only *13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Matsushita and Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited. *14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor increase the number of recordable titles left. *15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback *16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be recorded (page 123). In this case, initialization will take about 1 hour. A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs DVD-R DL (dual-layer) and DVD+R DL (double-layer) discs contain two recordable layers on a single side, giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a conventional single-layer disc. This unit can record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs. • If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that some DVD recorders/players may not play even finalized DL discs.) • Please read the information provided on the disc packaging carefully before purchasing DVD-R DL/ DVD+R DL discs: • Confirm the disc version: Use ver. 3.0 / 2 x to 4 x DVD-R discs. • Confirm the recording speed: DVD-R should be compatible with 2 x or 4 x recording; DVD+R with 2.4 x to 8 x recording. • This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc: The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play. It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable. The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVDAudio content will not play. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. Other disc compatibility In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an unplayable format—see below for further compatibility information. Audio CD Video CD CD-R CD-RW Super Video CD (Super VCD) CD-R/RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. • Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX files. * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. • Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and Video CD/Super VCD) • Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only Compressed audio compatibility • Correct operation has been confirmed for DVD-R DL discs (ver. 3.0 / 2 x, 4 x) produced by the following manufacturers: Mitsubishi Kagaku Media, Verbatim (as of March 2005). • Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, DVR-640H-AV only: USB • Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) • Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz • Bit-rates: Any (128 Kbps or higher recommended) 46 En Before you start • Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes • WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) • DRM (Digital Rights Management)1 file playback: No • File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do not use for other file types) • File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable) • Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX® media files. • File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder. English • VBR WMA playback: No 01 • File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. DivX® VOD content DivX WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility The Windows Media® logo printed on the box indicates that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media® Player for Windows® XP, Windows Media® Player 9 or Windows Media® Player 10 series. Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DivX video compatibility DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files burned on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called "Titles." When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important • DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. • If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for this recorder, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play. • Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the recorder on page 148) will not cause you to lose your registration code. • Official DivX® Certified product. Note 1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other WMA recording equipment) and/or software. 47 En 01 Before you start JPEG file compatibility • Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files *File format used by digital still cameras • Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0 • Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels • Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels • Progressive JPEG compatible: No • File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for other file types) • File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Dolby Digital About the internal hard disk drive The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment. Depending on the conditions under which it is used, or through careless use, it is possible that the recorded contents will be damaged or lost completely, or that normal playback and recording will not be possible. Please understand that in the event of repair or replacement of the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings will be lost. Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure. The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect against accidental loss. Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from HDD failure. • Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes during EPG download when the display shows EPG). • Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface. • Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan. • Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure. • While the recorder is switched on (including during EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from the breaker switch. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. • Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below: 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the display, wait at least two minutes. 2 Unplug from the wall socket. DTS 3 Move the recorder. • If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. 48 En • The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will be possible. In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit. Before you start 01 Optimizing HDD performance English As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD (which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on page 124). Symbols used in this manual The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc. HDD HDD DVD Any type of DVD disc (recordable or playback only), finalized or not. DVD-Video Commercially produced DVD, finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW. DVD (Video) Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized) DVD (VR) VR mode DVD-R/-RW DVD+R DVD+R DVD+RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM DVD-RAM CD Audio CD Video CD Video CD Super VCD Super VCD WMA/MP3 WMA or MP3 files DivX DivX files ALL All of the above 49 En Connecting up 02 Chapter 2 Connecting up Rear panel connections 1 2 3 AV 1 (RGB) – TV 4 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) Y AC IN PB DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN OUTPUT L R OUT PR 5 COAXIAL IN G-LINK COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 6 7 8 9 1 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART connector. The video output is switchable between video, S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 129 for how to set this up. AUDIO VIDEO ANTENNA S-VIDEO Front panel connections On the front panel a flip-down cover hides more connections. 2 OUTPUT Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 3 AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB. See AV2/L1 In on page 130 for how to set this up. 4 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV. 5 AC IN – Power inlet 6 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect to the DVD/DVR1 coaxial jack on the receiver subwoofer. 7 CONTROL IN Connect to the CONTROL OUT terminal of the receiver subwoofer. 8 G-LINK™ Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable GUIDE Plus+™ to control an external satellite receiver, etc. 9 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input. 50 En OPEN/CLOSE DV IN USB 10 HDD/DVD 11 12 S-VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R (MONO) INPUT 13 10 USB port (type B) (DVR-640H-AV only) USB port for connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer. 11 USB port (type A) (DVR-640H-AV only) USB port for connecting a digital camera, USB memory or other USB device. 12 DV IN (DVR-640H-AV only) A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a DV camcorder. 13 INPUT 2 Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and Svideo video), especially suitable for camcorders, game consoles, portable audio, etc. Connecting up 02 The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page. Important • These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable. • The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio. The AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 129 and AV2/L1 In on page 130 for how to set them up. • Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. ANTENNA IN SCART AV CONNECTOR English Easy connections 1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR. • If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect it to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on this recorder and skip the next step. 2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to connect the antenna output of your VCR to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) of this recorder. 3 Use another RF antenna cable to connect the ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input on your TV. 4 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the SCART AV connector on your TV. 5 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your VCR. Tip • This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power Save on page 128). 4 TV 3 ANTENNA IN (RF IN) AV 1 (RGB) – TV AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) Y AC IN PB DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN OUTPUT R L OUT PR COAXIAL IN G-LINK COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO VIDEO ANTENNA S-VIDEO ANTENNA OUT 5 2 SCART AV CONNECTOR VCR ANTENNA OUT ANTENNA IN 1 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet 51 En 02 Connecting up Using other types of audio/video output Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output. If you have a cable, satellite or digital terrestrial receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on the following page.1 If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next page. Using the S-video or component video output • Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver. COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT S-VIDEO INPUT AUDIO INPUT 1 2 Using the setup on this page you can: • Change channels and set timer recordings on the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system (via the G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up). TV Important AV 1 (RGB) – TV AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) Y AC IN PB DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN OUTPUT L R OUT PR COAXIAL IN G-LINK COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO ANTENNA 1 Connect the S-video or component video output to a similar input on your TV. For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an Svideo input on your TV. • Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver. • When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a timer recording from an external receiver, make sure that the external receiver is switched on. For a component video connection, use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV. See also Component Video Out on page 129 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scan-compatible TV. 2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV. You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. SCART AV CONNECTOR 2 ANTENNA IN TV 1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN) AV 1 (RGB) – TV AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) Y AC IN PB DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN OUTPUT L R OUT PR COAXIAL IN G-LINK COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO VIDEO ANTENNA S-VIDEO ANTENNA OUT 4 SCART AV CONNECTOR ANTENNA OUT 3 Cable/Satellite/ Digital Terrestrial receiver 1 ANTENNA IN 1 Satellite dish/ antenna/cable TV wall outlet Note 1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections. 52 En Connecting up 02 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV. This enables you to watch discs. 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your cable box/satellite/digital terrestrial receiver. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. 4 Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™ jack. This enables you to control the tuner in the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system. Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite/digital terrestrial receiver will pick up the control signals (see diagram). Connecting an external decoder box (1) If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this page. See the previous page for how to connect the G-LINK™ cable. English 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. Important • Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder. • Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off (in standby). • For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched on during recording. • It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup. AV 1 (RGB) – TV Y PB DIGITAL OUT CONTROL OUTPUT L R PR COAXIAL IN G-LINK COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO SCART AV CONNECTOR G-LINK cable 4 See the manual that came with your cable/satellite/ digital terrestrial receiver if you’re not sure where the IR receiver is on the front panel. Alternatively, experiment with the remote control, operating it from very close range until you find the place where the receiver responds. TV AV 1 (RGB) – TV AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) Y AC IN PB DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN OUTPUT R L OUT PR COAXIAL IN G-LINK COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO VIDEO S-VIDEO ANTENNA Tip • This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power Save on page 128). 3 SCART AV CONNECTOR 2 SCART AV CONNECTOR VCR/Satellite receiver /Cable box Decoder ANTENNA IN 1 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet 53 En 02 Connecting up 1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed instructions. 3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder. 4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to your TV. Connecting an external decoder box (2) If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.1 Using the setup on this page you can: • Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner. Important • Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/ receiver. SCART AV CONNECTOR ANTENNA IN 2 TV 1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN) AV 1 (RGB) – TV AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) Y AC IN PB DIGITAL OUT CONTROL IN OUTPUT R L OUT PR COAXIAL IN COMPONENT VIDEO OUT G-LINK AUDIO VIDEO ANTENNA S-VIDEO ANTENNA OUT 3 1 SCART AV CONNECTOR Decoder Antenna/cable TV wall outlet 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV. This enables you to watch discs. 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note 1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu: • Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 130). • From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 129). 54 En Connecting up 02 Connecting a DV camcorder DVR-640H-AV only Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is possible to connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW discs to DVD-R/RW. OPEN/CLOSE English Connecting other AV sources HDD/DVD STANDBY/ON AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT (Rear panel) – CH + ONE TOUCH COPY STOP REC REC Important AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT (Front panel) 1 2 • This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is not compatible with digital satellite receivers or DVHS video decks. OPEN/CLOSE HDD/DVD STANDBY/ON Analog camcorder AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT DVR-640H-AV – CH + ONE TOUCH COPY REC STOP REC DV IN AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT DV OUT VCR 1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder. • You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. • Alternatively, you can use the AV2(INPUT 1/ DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input and output with just one SCART cable. 2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder. • You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. DV camcorder 1 Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV jack of your DV camcorder/video deck to the front panel DV IN jack of this recorder. Connecting a USB device DVR-640H-AV only Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can connect USB devices such as digital cameras and printers . Please also see the instructions that came with the device you want to connect before using. OPEN/CLOSE HDD/DVD STANDBY/ON • The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder input. – CH + ONE TOUCH COPY STOP REC REC DVR-640H-AV USB Type B USB PictBridge-compatible Printer USB Type A USB Digital Camera Important • Devices may not work reliably if connected to this recorder via a USB hub. 55 En 02 Connecting up JPEG file storage devices • Digital still camera • Memory card reader (any type of memory card) • USB memory The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it. The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to transfer up to about 4000 files. WMA/MP3 file storage devices • Memory card reader (any type of memory card) • USB memory The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it. Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used, the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To read another card, remove all the cards and insert the card to be read again. Using a USB printer • Use a PictBridge-comaptible printer. Plugging in After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder. 1 Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet. 56 En Controls and displays 03 Chapter 3 English Controls and displays Front panel 2 1 3 4 5 OPEN/CLOSE 7 6 8 HDD/DVD STANDBY/ON USB DV IN DVR-640H-AV 1 STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 2 Disc tray 3 OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. S-VIDEO 9 – CH + ONE TOUCH COPY STOP REC REC VIDEO L AUDIO R (MONO) INPUT 10 11 12 13 14 13 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 106) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 14 STOP REC Press to stop recording. 4 HDD / DVD indicators Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected. 5 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 79) Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast. 6 HDD/DVD Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and playback. 7 Front panel display See Display on page 58 for details. 8 REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in 30 minute blocks. 9 Front panel inputs See Front panel connections on page 50 for more information on these. 10 Press to start or restart playback. 11 Press to stop playback. 12 CH +/– Use to change channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc. 57 En Controls and displays 03 Display 1 2 3 4 L R 8 7 MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode. 2 Lights when copying. 6 3 Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused. 7 R / RW Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is loaded. 4 8 (page 79) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.) NTSC Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC. (page 130) Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. (page 129) Lights when the component video output is set to progressive scan. VPS / PDC (page 79) Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording. 5 Recording quality indicators (page 77) XP Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best quality). SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). LP / SLP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play) or SLP (super-long play). EP / SEP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play) or SEP (super-extended play). En P 6 1 Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused. 58 5 Character display PL (page 97) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 2 3 (page 134) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. Getting started 04 Chapter 4 Switching on and setting up When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output. English Getting started ENTER 5 Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or ‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’. k Setting Auto Channel Setting Line System If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder. er Save English Auto Scan P Download from TV p Navigator Do not Set • Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example). 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. • You can only use the Download from TV feature if this recorder is connected to your TV using a fullywired 21-pin SCART cable via the AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this function (check your TV’s instruction manual for more details). RECORDER 2 Switch on the recorder. When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 128). ENTER • If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will take a few seconds to download country, TV screen size and language information. (Check the manual that came with your TV for compatibility information.) ENTER 3 Choose a language (then press ENTER). • Select your country. k Setting Country Selection t Line System er Save Country Austria P • Auto-tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets. Tuning Initial Setup Basic Language Clock Setting Tuner Input Line System Video In/ O ut Pow er Save Audio In Help Audio O ut Setup N avig ator Language Re cording Playback 32/99 Cancel • Downloading channels from your TV Use the Download from TV option to download all the channels that your TV is tuned to. Downloading 4 ENTER Pr 5 Start the Setup Navigator. 32/99 Cancel k Setting t Line Complete System this setup before you start using your recorder. er Save Start P p Navigator Cancel Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. • If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. ENTER 6 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually. k Setting Clock Setting Line System er Save Auto P Manual 59 En Getting started 04 • Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER. Use the / buttons to move from one field to another. • You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN. ENTER 7 Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’. k Setting Auto Clock Setting Line System Date er Save Time P –– / –– / –––– k Setting TV Screen Size Line System –– : –– p Navigator Clock Set CH Pr 1 S t ar t k Setting Auto Clock Setting Standard (4:3) ENTER 8 Select whether or not your TV is compatible with progressive scan video. SUN 01 / 01 / 2006 k Setting Progressive 11 : 20 p Navigator Clock Set CH Line System Pr 1 er Save Compatible S t ar t P Not Compatible N ext p Navigator Don't Know If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual. • Wide (16:9) P p Navigator The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed. Line System Date er Save Time P er Save Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually. • Note that progressive scan video is only output through the AV1(RGB)-TV connector and the component video outputs. 9 ENTER Press to continue after reading the HDD caution. Use the / buttons to set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. k Setting In the event of HDD failure, recordings may be lost or normal playback/recording may Line not System be possible. er Save As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD P failure, we recommend to use the HDD only as temporary storage media. p Navigator Please copy recordings you want to keep to recordable DVD. 1/2 k Setting Manual Clock Setting Press ENTER to continue. Line System Time Zone er Save Austria Vienna P p Navigator Summer Time Off ENTER Press then use the / buttons to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER. Select On if you are currently using summer time. 10 Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again. k Setting S etup i s compl ete! Line System er SaveEnj oy usi ng your DV D r ecor der ! 1/2 k Setting Manual Clock Setting p Navigator Summer Time That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. On Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. 2/2 k Setting Manual Clock Setting P Time p Navigator SUN 01 / 01 / 2006 00 : 00 Time Zone Austria Vienna Summer Time On Use the / buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. 60 En Go B ack Austria Vienna P Line System Date er Save Fi ni sh S etup p Navigator Line System Time Zone er Save • If there are blank channels with no station, you can set these to skip using the manual channel setting. See Manual CH Setting on page 129. Getting started 04 SET UP 1 /ST– The GUIDE Plus+™ system is a free, interactive onscreen television programming guide. The system offers program listings for all major channels, one-touch recording, search by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more. MCACC 3 7 /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ 3 /ST+ 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE 8 ADVANCED 0 9 ENTER Enter your postal code. English Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system 4 For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is important that you set the language and country correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have performed a scan for available channels, as these are all used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see Switching on and setting up on page 59). TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information. The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once this is done, all future updates are automatic. 1 GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. The language and country settings are already set to whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator. ENTER 2 Highlight ‘Postal Code’. The system uses your postal code to identify which TV listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it is important that you enter it correctly. 4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable, complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below. • See Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver on page 52 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable. • Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in 2 and 3 if you need to.) After pressing ENTER: • Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite). • Select your provider (if applicable). • Select the brand of your external receiver. • Identify which input your external receiver is connected to. After completing these steps the recorder will try and communicate with your external receiver and change the channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was successfully changed, select Yes to confirm. 61 En 04 Getting started If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your external receiver. If none of the codes changes the channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby; it will wake up automatically and download new codes from the host channel. The next day, try this setup process again: • Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. • Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in standby overnight. C If you use both an external receiver and this recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is unsuccessful try the external receiver method. About EPG download • EPG data can only be received when the recorder is in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore, please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is downloading. • Press to highlight the Menu bar, then use to reach the Setup area and select Setup. • Continue setting up from the start of this step again. If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the GLINK controller, please call customer support and report the brand and model of your external receiver. • If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see the above table) then you won’t be able to use the GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area, set the postal code again.) See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on page 73. 5 Identify the host channel for your country. The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+ system is distributed throughout Europe by selected broadcasters called host channels. It is important that the host channel for your country is correctly identified in order to receive listings information (EPG download). • Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you live, you can still set ShowView timer recordings and manual recordings — see Setting a timer recording on page 79. • The front panel display shows EPG when receiving data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG download, the download is canceled. Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup: A If you are not using an external receiver, this recorder will automatically scan all channels for the host channel: • EPG data may be received several times a day. All updates are automatic. • When downloading EPG data, the recorder may sound as though it is on. This is normal. • Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave it switched on). B If you are using an external receiver, you need to identify the host channel from the table below: Country/ Region Host channels Austria Eurosport Belgium RTL-TVI TMF will be switched off in the near Music Factory future. (TMF) France Canal+ Germany Eurosport Italy Sport Italia Comments 1 Analog only Analog only Netherlands Music Factory TMF will be switched off in the near (TMF), future. Eurosport 62 En Spain Tele 5 Switzerland Eurosport UK ITV, Eurosport Checking the downloaded data the following day Analog only ITV is analog only. Use Eurosport if you are a SKY subscriber and you no longer have a terrestrial antenna. GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. Getting started • Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted. English You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV listings information. Use the / buttons to review the list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the Editor screen: 04 • Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that are OFF are hidden. Use the /// buttons to move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as necessary. • For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+ system will need to know how it is received (the source) and on which program number. The source may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an external receiver. The program number is the number on which the channel can be found on its receiving device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must match this number for correct recording of that channel. • The above is especially important for the ‘host channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is always switched ON. SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ 3 /ST+ 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE 8 9 2 Change the program numbers as you 0 like. Changing the program numbers allows you to decide the order in which the channels change when stepping through them sequentially. You can do this to group certain channels together, for example. ADVANCED 3 When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button (Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen. • You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE Plus+ system in the following chapter. 63 En 05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide Chapter 5 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide The GUIDE Plus+ system ™ The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free, interactive onscreen television programming guide.1 The system provides program listings for all major channels, onetouch recording, searching by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a convenient way to find out what's on right now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre. The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections quickly and easily. In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information. If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 61 before proceeding. Using the GUIDE Plus+ system All the various features and areas are colour-coded for ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of some setup screens) have the following common elements: 3 1 5 2 1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching the current program while using the GUIDE Plus+ system. Legal Notice 2 Information panels – Display program promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system. 3 Action bar – colour-coded Action buttons change function depending on the area. 4 Information box – Shows short program descriptions or help menus. 5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the GUIDE Plus+ system. 6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next seven days by channel and time. Note 1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 128). En 6 * GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates. GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. 64 4 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 05 GUIDE Plus+ navigation Key What it does REC Press to set or cancel One Button Recording. GUIDE Press to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen (also use to exit). /// Use to navigate screens (highlight an item). RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE Action buttons that change functionality depending on the Area. MENU Press to jump directly to the Menu bar. ENTER 1 Highlight a program title. 2 Press the RED Action button (Record). The program is now set for recording. When the program is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct channel and start recording1. TIMER REC Press to go directly to the Schedule area. INFO Press to display extended information for the current program. • You can also use the REC button to set the recording. ENTER Press to confirm a selection or to leave the GUIDE Plus+ screen. • You can review the shows you have set to record in the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on page 68). Number buttons Use for numeric entry. / Press to select the previous/next page of information (in the grid, for example). / Press to select the previous/next day. One-Button-Record The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you can highlight a program title, including from the Grid, after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV area. The program name, date, channel, recording start and end times are all set automatically when you set a timer recording using One-Button-Record. English The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system. Lock / Unlock video window When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel you were watching remains visible in the video window. The date stamp above the window lets you know the channel, date and time. The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video window. When locked, the video window always shows the channel you were previously watching as you move up and down through the listings grid. If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that channel is shown in the video window. ENTER If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled recording on page 69). 1 Highlight a channel logo. Note 1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the program broadcast schedules. 65 En 05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide Channel logos are displayed to the left of program titles. The Grid Area 2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock). The padlock icon above the video window becomes unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your current TV viewing session. The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when you press GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next seven days, starting with the current day. If you want to lock the video window again, follow the same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as Lock. When you highlight a program in the Grid, you can see information about it in the Information Box, including title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button to see it. Channel mosaic screen You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button. Select the channel icon you want using the cursor buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous screen on that channel. In some countries, you can also see a rating for a particular program (mostly movies). These ratings are provided by local partners, such as TV magazines. From the Grid Area you can: • View and scroll through program listings • Read program synopsis • Tune to a program that’s currently showing1 Areas The GUIDE Plus+™ system consists of seven Areas. All Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar. • Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area. Displays TV listings information for the next seven days by time and channel. • Set a program to record • Lock or unlock the video window. • Access Information panels. Browsing the Grid Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid: • Search – Search for TV programs by category (e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword. /// (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid • My TV – Set up a profile and receive recommendations according to your preferences. / – Previous / next day / – Previous / next page • Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings. BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in the Grid. • Info – Area for additional information, such as weather (not available in all regions). ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE Plus+ system and start watching the program • Editor – Change channel settings. • Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+™ system. The Search Area From the Search Area you can: • Search by category • Search by subcategory • Search by keyword • Read program synopsis • Tune to a program that’s currently showing • Set a program to record • Access Information panels. Note 1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel. This is normal. 66 En Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide Using My Choice keywords for a search You can search for programs by category, subcategory or by keyword (My Choice). Categories for searching include Movies (purple), Sport (green), Children (blue) and Others (teal). In some countries there is a further subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. These are programs recommended by a local partner, such as a TV magazine. In addition to the standard categories, you can also set your own keywords. ENTER 1 English Searching 05 Access My Choice. ENTER 1 Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar. ENTER 2 Select a category and a subcategory. 2 Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword. ENTER 3 Enter a keyword to appear in the menu. • If you choose All as the subcategory, all programs in the category you selected will show up in the search results. 3 ENTER Start the search. The search results are shown sorted by time and date. • If no search results are displayed, it means there are no programs for the current day that match your search criteria. When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue. 4 Start the keyword search. • You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and GREEN Action buttons. ENTER • When you have set more than two keywords, an All subcategory automatically appears which allows you to search for all your keywords. 67 En Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 05 My TV Area The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile. You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set, the GUIDE Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings for the next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a list of programs matching your profile appears. 4 To add a theme to your profile, highlight ‘Themes’ and press the YELLOW Action button. From the My TV Area you can: • Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword. • Edit and delete profiles. • Read program synopsis • Tune to a program that’s currently showing • Set a program to record • Access Information panels. Setting up a profile You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16 channels, four categories and 16 keywords. 1 Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar. 2 Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile. Channels is now highlighted. 3 To add a channel to your profile, press the YELLOW Action button. Select a theme from the Search Area categories and press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four categories. 5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight ‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button. Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue. 6 Press ENTER to activate your profile. • You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5. • You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and GREEN Action buttons. The Schedule Area The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and delete scheduled (timer) recordings. (See also Setting a timer recording on page 79 for further timer recording features.) From the Schedule Area you can: • Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording. • Set, edit or delete a ShowView recording. Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels. 68 En • Set, edit or delete a manual recording. Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide Editing a scheduled recording 4 Enter a name for the scheduled recording. English You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or delete it if you no longer require it. 1 05 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording. Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select characters from the on-screen keyboard. • If you only want to edit the recording quality, frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip to step 6 below. 2 Press the GREEN Action button (Edit). After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action button to continue. 5 Highlight the right recording tile. 6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change the recording quality. 3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the recording date, start time, end time and channel. Select from AUTO1, XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or MN (if manual recording is set to On.) Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons or the number buttons to edit. 7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to change the recording frequency. Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the RED Action button to go back. Note 1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD. 69 En 05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide Select from the various options for one-time, daily and weekly recordings. Deleting a scheduled recording 1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording. 8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to select the recording destination. 2 Press the RED Action button (Delete). The scheduled event is deleted. Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace Recording)1. • Auto Replace Recording is only available as an option with regular daily or weekly recordings. Setting a ShowView™ recording 1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar. 9 Press (cursor right) to access the extended recording options: • If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one. • Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or VPS/PDC2 (V–P)). • Press (cursor left) to display the standard recording options again. Note 1 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 132) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. • If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. • If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased. 2 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby. • Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on. • Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC. • VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO. 70 En Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 2 Press the RED Action button (ShowView). 5 Enter the recording end time in the same way, followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm. English 3 Use the number buttons to enter a ShowView programming number. 4 In the same way, enter the recording start time, followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm. 05 6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm. • If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel number. Follow the on-screen display to do this. 4 Press ENTER to confirm. Setting a manual recording 1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar. Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button (Mosaic) and use the /// buttons to select a channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER. The Info Area This area is reserved for additional information such as news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in all countries/regions.) The Editor Area 2 Press the GREEN Action button (Manual). 3 Use the number and /// buttons to enter the recording date, then press the GREEN Action button (Next). The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage your channels. Any changes you make here will affect what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to make any manual changes as necessary. You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become available in your area, or if you change from cable to satellite, say, or move house. From the Editor Area you can: • Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel on/off). • Select a channel source (Tuner, Ext. Rec. 1, Ext. Rec. 2, etc.). • Enter a channel program number. 71 En Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 05 Switching a channel on/off The Setup Area You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor Area. The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+ system for your particular region, TV reception conditions, and so on. 1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar. Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup 1 Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar. Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen. Basic Setup Host Channel Setup GUIDE Plus+ System Information 2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you want to switch on or off. 3 Press the RED Action button to switch the channel on or off. 2 Highlight the part you want to change. Changing the source and program number 1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar. You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code1 and the External Receiver settings. 3 Press ENTER to confirm. 2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel you want to make a change to. 3 Press the RED Action button to change the channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter a program number. Each press of the RED Action button changes the channel source (Tuner, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a program number, use the number buttons to enter a program number then press ENTER. (When set to Tuner, make sure that the program number matches the preset number of this recorder for what you want to record). Note 1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours. 72 En Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide Manual Host Channel setup If you know your Host Channel details (source and program number) or if the automatic identification did not provide the expected result, you can identify your Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV. Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external receiver) and enter the respective program number (e.g., if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your Host Channel, enter 9 as the program number). When you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE Plus+ system will complete the Host Channel setup. You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data. GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at: www.europe.guideplus.com FAQ • When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not get any of the attempts to work, what should I do? A: There could be several reasons why your external receiver could not be controlled. – The connections could be wrong. Make sure that the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver on page 52. – The code that is listed under your brand could be wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the on-screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE Plus+ system can change channels on your external receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process, choosing different reception and external receiver combinations until you have tried all the codes for your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on how to receive new codes overnight. – The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly data downloads frequently include new codes for controlling external receivers. Please tune your external receiver to your local host channel and leave it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+ setup again to see if your external receiver can now be controlled. English The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby for the first time. See the table on page 62 for a list of all the European Host Channels. 05 – The external receiver that you use is currently not supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on overnight, and doing the Reception and External Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please call Customer Support to report your brand and model. • My external receiver was successfully setup. However I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has to change to a channel with a 3-digit program number in the external receiver's preset, it does not work. It looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only send two digits. With the number of channels increasing, the number of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4. It is possible that you selected an older code for your brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area, select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen question about whether the receiver has changed to a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent a different code). Try all the different codes until your GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to receive new codes overnight. • I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have “upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with external receiver. What should I do to receive data for the GUIDE Plus+ system? You can try to receive your host channel through your new reception method. If you have problems to receive data we recommend that you keep your analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive data this way. It is important that you identify your host channel correctly in the Editor Area. • After I performed the initial set-up I found that the lineup for all the channels received via the external set top box is incorrect. How do I correct this? You can change the line-up in the editor according to your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the channels that you would like to change. Change the source and preset number according to your preferences. • I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have a blank EPG what is going wrong? There are several possibilities: 73 En 05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide – Connections are wrong. See Connecting up on page 50 to double check everything. – The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 61). – Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has not been connected for enough time to receive the TV listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight. – For external receiver users only: The connections and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 61) and leave the recorder in standby and the external receiver on overnight tuned to the correct host channel. – You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet available. Check the list of countries to see if you are in a region that is supported. • I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong channel. If the channel to be recorded is received via the external receiver first make sure that the external receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the source and program number of the channel that you wanted to record. Change the source and preset numbers if incorrect. If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner (the Tuner setting), make sure that the program number is the same as the preset number set on this recorder. If they are different, go to the Editor Area and change the program number to match the recorder’s preset number. • The TV listings information doesn’t update. The latest TV listings information is automatically downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder is left on, it will not download. When not using the recorder, please switch it into standby. Data downloads can take several hours. The front panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the download will be canceled. • The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area, but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop this from happening? If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 61). When the GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area, please set the postal code again. 74 En • The automatic Host Channel search failed or the GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host Channel for my region. You can identify your Host Channel manually. See Manual Host Channel setup on page 73 for how to do this. Recording 06 Chapter 6 English Recording • The maximum continuous recording time for one title is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc. About DVD recording This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends on what you want to do with the recording which mode you choose. If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way, VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying, and changing the way the video is presented. Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs1). Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all recording on that disc will be in that mode. DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording. DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording. • If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the total number of recordable titles remaining may not increase. • Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 134. • Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs. • Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder. • See also Disc / content format playback compatibility on page 45 for detailed disc compatibility information. DVD+R discs do not require initializing. Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs Important The table below shows the maximum number of titles recordable per disc and the maximum number of chapters per title: Disc type/rec. format Max. titles (per disc) Max. chapters (per title) DVD-R/-RW Video mode 99 99 DVD-R/-RW/RAM VR mode 99 999*1 DVD+R/+RW 49 99*2 Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however, please note the following points: • When the recorder switches from the first layer to the second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new title is automatically started on the new layer. • Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when the layer is switched, recording will stop. • Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc. *1 • You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD recorder. A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc. *2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc. • This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized Video mode and DVD+R discs recorded on another recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on another recorder are playable on this recorder but are not recordable. Note 1.Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. 75 En 06 Recording About HDD recording Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality options, including manual mode, and of course you can record, erase and re-record as many times as you like. The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it, even using the higher quality recording modes. Important • The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached. • The maximum continuous recording time for one title is 12 hours. • It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting (page 134) matches the TV line system of the source you’re recording. HDD Video mode compatibility When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see page 133). When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 130). When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed copying isn’t possible. However, both channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback. Recorded audio In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible). When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting 76 En (page 130) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on playback. Restrictions on video recording You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed onscreen. Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to HDD, CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/RW (see below), or DVD-RAM. When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 95). CPRM CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media. This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVDR (ver. 2.0 / 8 x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Recording 06 Note • When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 130). There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note that you can’t change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby. CHANNEL + ENTER • 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 • CHANNEL +/– buttons CHANNEL – SET UP /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ 3 Switching between TV and DVD /ST+ 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE 8 ADVANCED 0 English Using the built-in TV tuner 9 Number buttons For example, to select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34, press 3, 4, ENTER.1 • CH +/– buttons on the front panel When the recorder is stopped or recording you can choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’), or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV mode’). Changing audio channels During playback or when a menu is being displayed onscreen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting. You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal. Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature. AUDIO • MAIN SUB + Press to change the audio type. The current audio channel is displayed on-screen. • If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 130) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. Switch between TV mode and DVD mode. NICAM Setting the picture quality/recording time Regular DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD • If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language. NICAM A Regular TV/DVD • NICAM B NICAM A+B • You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast. A (L) B (R) A + B (L+R) • When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 130), you can switch the audio channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R). L R L+R Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual Recording on page 132), a further option will be available (MN1 to MN32 or LPCM, depending on what you set). When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP. REC MODE • Press repeatedly to select the recording quality. • XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc. • SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD. • LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four hours. Note 1. Channel presets are numbered 1 to 99. 77 En Recording 06 • EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc. • SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc. • SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD disc. 3 Basic recording from the TV DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD AUDIO • When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. REC Start recording. 5 If you want to set a recording end time, press the REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. • To cancel the set recording time, press REC. Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the channel to record, choosing whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality. • If you want to pause recording at any time, press PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts) HDD/DVD 1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. • If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc). • If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 85). CHANNEL + ENTER 2 Select a TV channel to record. The front panel display shows the channel number: Set the picture quality/recording time. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time above for detailed instructions. 4 MAIN SUB + Select the audio channel to record. See Changing audio channels on page 77 for more on this. • MN1 to MN32 / LPCM1 – Manual / Linear PCM (available only when manual recording is on) The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 133) is Off then this information is not displayed.) REC MODE STOP REC 6 Press to stop recording. • If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing STOP REC. • Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are programmed to start at the same time, then the program that actually starts first takes priority. CHANNEL – Tip Channel preset • While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel. (For channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER) • If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the CH +/ – buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. • During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop through function. During recording, press the front panel CH + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop through on), or CH – to switch to SCART NORM (loop though off). Loop through is automatically reset to off after recording has finished. Note that you can’t switch loop through on if recording from the AV2/ (INPUT 1/DECODER) or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors. Note 1.Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 130). 78 En Recording 06 Setting a timer recording HDD ALL The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV program you’re watching. When you’re ready to resume watching, just press the Play button. Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programs can be set to record just once, every day, or every week. To use this feature the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and the AV Link setting (page 134) should be set to This Recorder Only. Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you’re not sure. Important • Pause Live TV will not work as expected when watching TV via an external component such as a VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel selected on the TV. 1 PAUSE LIVE TV Start recording the current TV channel. Recording continues with playback paused. • Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording to start. PLAY 2 Press to start playback. You can also use the scan buttons (/ ), pause ( PAUSE) and stop ( STOP)—all without affecting the recording. STOP REC 3 Press to stop the recording. Tip • You can press PAUSE LIVE TV while the recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately start recording. After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will take at least 10 seconds for the picture to change (during this time, all controls except the power button are inoperative). • Please note that you can’t record from another component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector using the Pause Live TV feature. English Pause Live TV There are two ways to program a timer recording; using the GUIDE Plus+ system (see The Schedule Area on page 68) or using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see Easy Timer Recording below). You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD). You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recording made on that timer program will be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 132 for more on this). Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording, the Recovery Recording feature will automatically record the program to the HDD for you. This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that a timer recording catches the whole program even when the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer programs can be set with VPS/PDC on. Important • A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32 timer programs waiting to be recorded. • Timer recording will not start if: – The recorder is already recording. – A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. • Timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished. 79 En 06 Recording • The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable). • Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions. Easy Timer Recording As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.1 1 HOME MENU Select ‘Easy Timer’ from the Home Menu. 2 PREV NEXT Easy Timer Recording • The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title (HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12 hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles. • VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in your country/area. Check with the stations for compatibility. Set the TV channel to record. 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 1/01 2/01 3/01 SAT 3 • The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download program information. During these times, VPS/PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you set a timer recording for these times. 9:30 1/01 Pr 7 REC MODE – ––:–– HDD/DVD SP HDD REC MODE Set the recording quality. • DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. • HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank DVD disc. HDD/DVD 4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. ENTER 5 Move the cursor to the recording start date and time on the grid. • You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at a time using the and buttons. Current time Recording start time Easy Timer Recording 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 1/01 2/01 3/01 SAT 1/01 Pr 7 11:45 REC MODE – ––:–– SP HDD/DVD HDD Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is a 15 minute interval. The darker area represents time that has already passed and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time that’s available. Note 1.You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. Set a scheduled recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system if you want to use VPS/PDC. 80 En Recording 06 Stopping a timer recording STOP REC 1 Press during a timer recording. • You can go back and reset the start time if you need to by pressing RETURN. English 6 ENTER Set the start time. The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the screen. ENTER 2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm. ENTER 7 Move the cursor to the recording end time on the grid. Recording start time Recording end time Easy Timer Recording 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished. 1/01 2/01 RECORDER 3/01 SAT 1/01 Pr 7 1 11:45 – 13:45 REC MODE SP HDD/DVD HDD As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow stretches from the start time to the current cursor position, representing the length of the recording. A recording of up to six hours can be set. 8 ENTER Set the end time. If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 2 [Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again. • To unlock the recorder, press and hold STOP on the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCK. ENTER 9 Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or ‘No’ to go back to the Easy Timer Recording screen. • You can check the timer recording details you just set from the Schedule Area in the GUIDE Plus system; see The Schedule Area on page 68. Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example. Canceling or extending the timer REC Press and hold for three seconds during a 1 timer recording. Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears from the front panel display indicating that the timer has been canceled. REC Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 2 minute blocks. 81 En 06 Recording PLAY Timer recording FAQ Frequently Asked Questions • Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start recording! Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 123), and that there are fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD. • Press during recording to start playback from the beginning of the current recording1. DISC • NAVIGATOR Press during recording to select another title to play. You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. • To stop playback, press STOP (recording will continue). • The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why not? • To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will continue). You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set. • During recording or in timer recording standby, you can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 134). Also, during simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop. • What happens when two or more timer programs overlap? Basically, the program with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the program with the later start time after the earlier program is finished. If two programs have the same times (but different channels, for example), the program set most recently takes priority. If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are programmed to start at the same time, then the program that actually starts first takes priority. Recording from an external component DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) HDD Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in progress from the start, without having to wait until the recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording in progress. You can watch anything else already on the HDD (or on a DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 89). DVR-640H-AV only: Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input. You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s external inputs. 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options. 2 VIDEO IN Press repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display: • AV2/L1 – Input 12 • L2 – Input 2 (front panel) DVR-640H-AV only: • DV – DV input (front panel) Check that the Audio In settings for DV Input, External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 130). Note 1.You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up. 2.This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 130). 82 En Recording 3 REC MODE Set the recording quality. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 77 for detailed information. HDD/DVD 4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 1 Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 130). Press to start recording. • The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also pause if the signal is interrupted during recording. • If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 76 for more details. Set the recording quality. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 77 for detailed information. 3 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require. See DV Input on page 130 for more on this. REC 5 REC MODE English • If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording. 06 4 HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’, then ‘DV Record’ from the Home Menu. • DV recording only works when the digital camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. ENTER Recording from a DV camcorder DVR-640H-AV only You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using the recorder’s remote, you can control both the camcorder and this recorder. 5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’. 6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. For best results, pause playback at the point from which you want to record. • Depending on your camcorder, you can use this recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the , , , , , / and / buttons. Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the DV IN jack is setup (see DV Input on page 130). Important ENTER 7 Select ‘Start Rec’. • The source signal must be DVC-SD format • Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorder’s remote. • If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, you cannot control the second unit from this one. • You can’t control this unit remotely from a component connected to the DV IN jack. • You can’t record date and time information from DV cassette. • During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will pause recording. Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is more than 10 seconds of blank tape, this recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder). • For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to playpause. Stop 1.02.22 Stop Control with these buttons Start Rec Pause Rec Stop Rec HDD Rem. SP (2h00m/DVD) 32h45m • You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording. • If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately. 83 En 06 Recording • HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for example. • While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button. Frequently Asked Questions • I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what you’re trying to record is not copy-protected. If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder then switch back on. Finalizing a disc DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.2 Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 123 before starting the steps below. DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However, if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc, then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even after finalizing. although the title menu will disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu. • There’s a picture, but no sound! Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on page 130) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.1 Important • Once you’ve finalized a Video mode or DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 124 for how to do this. Playing your recordings on other DVD players • A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing. DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in Video mode and DVD+R discs. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to (finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. When you finalize a Video mode or DVD+R disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc. All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the /// followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. • Video mode DVD-R DL discs and DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/ players. Note however that some recorders/players will not play even finalized dual-layer discs. 1 Load the disc you want to finalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. 2 HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Screen’. Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ > ‘Next Disc Setup Basic Finalize Next Screen Initialize Finalize Undo Finalize Start Optimize HDD Note 1.If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 130). 2.If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 134 for how to change the recorder’s setting. 84 En Recording 4 For Video mode and DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD player. DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must initialize it before recording anything on the disc. DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in order to erase the contents of the disc. English ENTER 06 Important Finalize • Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! • You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder. • Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. During finalization: • If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/ +RW disc is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears. • Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t reinitialize a DVD-R back to Video mode. HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home 1 Menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’. Disc Setup • You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R disc. • How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. Video mode DVD-R/-RW and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to 20 minutes. Initializing recordable DVD discs Basic VR Mode Start Initialize Video Mode Start Finalize Initialize DVD+RW Start Optimize HDD ENTER 3 Select ‘Start’. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to 1 hour). Initializing Disc Pr 1 1 min left DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording.1 When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 132 if you want to change the default to Video mode. Note 1.If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. 85 En 07 Playback Chapter 7 Playback • If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 88. Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN button. PLAY 3 Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/ DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. • When playing video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached. • There may be a slight pause when playback switches from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc. • Many functions are not available when a Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Stop playback, then press for non-PBC playback. • See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. • For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) on page 115. STOP 4 Basic playback ALL This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD. Important • Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. • Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. HDD/DVD 1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below. Select DVD for any kind of disc playback. OPEN/CLOSE 2 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). 86 En Start playback. • If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the /// buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. Press to stop playback. 5 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. Playback 07 Playing from the HDD The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD). Press to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. PLAY STOP PAUSE Press to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached. PLAY Press to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.) STOP Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. PAUSE PREV NEXT SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 /TUNE+ SR+ 2 3 ENTER /ST+ 5 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE 8 9 ADVANCED SOUND 0 CLEAR ENTER CM BACK CM SKIP ENTER / / TOP MENU DISC NAVIGATOR MENU ENTER RETURN Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) DVD+R/DVD+RW only: PREV may not always skip to the previous title. Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the number buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER. All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again. DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only: (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of ten minutes forward or three minutes back. While paused, press and hold to start slowmotion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. PREV NEXT SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ 3 /ST+ 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE 8 9 ADVANCED SOUND English Playing DVD discs Press to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.) Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title. Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again. 0 CLEAR ENTER CM BACK ENTER CM SKIP / / (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of ten minutes forward or three minutes back. While paused, press and hold to start slowmotion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this recorder will display the Disc Navigator. Press MENU to display the disc menu.) Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVDVideo disc menus; press ENTER to select items. Press to return to the previous level of a DVDVideo disc menu. 87 En 07 Playback Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs Playing Video CD/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs1, and WMA/MP3 files. The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs. Press to start playback. PLAY STOP Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch.2 Press to stop playback. PAUSE Press to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the place last stopped. PLAY Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. STOP SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 PREV NEXT /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ 3 /ST+ 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE 8 9 ADVANCED SOUND Except WMA: Press to start scanning. Press again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) Press to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) PAUSE During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again. PREV NEXT 0 CLEAR Press to stop playback. Video CD only: You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.) Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. Press to skip to previous/next track. When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) ENTER SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ 3 /ST+ 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE 8 9 ADVANCED SOUND 0 CLEAR ENTER CM BACK ENTER CM SKIP / RETURN During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. Video CD only: Each press skips backward/ forward progressively up to a maximum of ten minutes forward or three minutes back. Note that this function doesn’t work when playing in PBC mode. While paused, press and hold to start slowmotion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed (forward only). While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward only). Press to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. Note 1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 94). 2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing to start playback instead of PLAY. 88 En Playback 07 Playing DivX video files Press to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback of titles (DivX files) proceeds in alphabetical order. PLAY STOP PAUSE PREV NEXT / Press to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.) Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. Press to skip to previous/next title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback. Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view information on titles. See also Editing on page 96 for more on editing recordable discs. HDD/DVD 1 2 Select the hard disk drive or DVD. DISC NAVIGATOR While paused, press to advance one frame. Press and hold to start slow motion playback (press repeatedly to change the slow motion play speed). Open the Disc Navigator. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 SP 11/29Mon 7:00PMPr 4 2ch 9 MAIN SUB + SUBTITLE MAIN SUB + Press to display the playback audio type; press repeatedly to change the playback audio type. 20:00 20:00 SP 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 19:00 19:00 MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 All Genres MENU SP 1h00m(1.0G) 7 Press to display subtitle information; press repeatedly to change subtitles. FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 2h00m(1.0G) 8 HDD SP Remain 30h30m SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Recent first AUDIO English The table below shows the basic playback controls for DivX video files. SP 1h00m(1.0G) • You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Browse the list of titles. • Use the / buttons to display the previous/ next page of titles. • To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 100. • For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 134. 4 ENTER Play the highlighted title. • You can also select Play from the command menu options. 89 En Playback 07 Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the same time. ENTER 3 Select what you want to play. Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all navigated in the same way. The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc. Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder that you want to play. ENTER 1 Display the View Options panel. CD WMA/MP3 Divx The View Options panel Disc Navigator (HDD) Style 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 SP 11/29Mon 7:00PMPr 4 2ch 2 20:00 20:00 FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP SP 2h00m(1.0G) 3 All Genres All Genres 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 MENU SP 1h00m(1.0G) 7 HDD SP Remain 30h30m 19:00 19:00 MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(1.0G) ENTER 2 Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the available view options. • Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view • Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first), unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest first) • Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre ENTER 3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. The title list display is updated according to the new display preferences. Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs DVD-Video 1 CD HOME MENU Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DivX Display the Home Menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Disc Navigator’. Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/ MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 90 En Track(001-004) 001.Intro 002.Escape 003.Everything You Say 004.What I Do 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) Recent first NEW first Genre Folder (01-03) 01.Rock 02.Pop 03.Dance 10Titles 11 4 Titles 4 Titles Sort order Disc Navigator Playback starts after you press ENTER. • For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/ MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the playback area between CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. This can only be done while the disc is stopped. Playback 07 Frame advance/frame reverse A L L (except WMA) DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backward.1 You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc3 or the HDD frame-by-frame. 1 During playback, start reverse or forward scanning. • The scanning speed is shown on-screen. With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only use frame advance. 2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning speed. There are four scanning speeds available when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also possible with HDD and DVD video.2 1 There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc. 3 English Scanning discs PAUSE / 2 press. Pause playback. / Back up or advance one frame with each PLAY Resume normal playback. PLAY 3 Resume normal playback. The Play Mode menu Playing in slow motion DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles can only be played forwards in slow motion. There is no sound when playing in slow motion. ALL The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and program play functions. Press PLAY MODE MAIN SUB + to display the Play Mode menu. Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search PAUSE 1 Pause playback. / / / / 2 Press and hold to start slow motion reverse or forward play. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. The current playback speed is indicated on-screen. • You can also access the Play Mode menu from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU). • To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE. PLAY 4 Resume normal playback. Note 1 • Only analog audio is output when scanning audio CDs. • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles. • Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs and DivX titles with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1 (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output, Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback). No sound is output when using other scan speeds. • No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during forward SCAN 1). • Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. 2 Reverse playback may not be smooth. 3 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. 91 En Playback 07 Search Mode 2 ENTER With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to start. ALL The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time1 or by title/chapter/ folder/track number. Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off ENTER 1 Select ‘Search mode’ from the Play Mode menu, then choose a search option. The available search options depend on the type of disc. SET UP 1 /ST– 4 MCACC 7 /TUNE+ 2 ENTER 5 SR+ 3 /ST+ 6 /TUNE– TEST TONE 8 9 ADVANCED 0 2 Enter a title/chapter/folder/track number or a search time. Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Input Time 0.01.00 3 ENTER With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round. • When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. • To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Repeat play Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0. Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0. Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6. ALL There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Program play below).3 ENTER 3 ENTER Start playback. A-B Repeat DVD HDD CD 1 Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu, then choose a repeat play mode. Play Mode Video CD DivX Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Program The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over.2 ENTER 1 During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu. En Disc Title Chapter Off • To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Note 1 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. 2 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled. 3 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled. 92 Repeat Repeat Repeat Repeat Playback 07 Program play CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 This feature lets you program the play order of titles/ chapters1/folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD. ENTER 1 Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit Program’. The Input/Edit Program screen varies according to the disc type. Below is the DVD input screen. Program Step 01.001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title Title Title Title (01-03) 01 02 03 Chapter(001-015) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Chapter 005 Chapter 006 Chapter 007 Chapter 008 • Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program list. English HDD DVD-Video • To repeat play the program list, select Program Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 92). • From the Program menu you can also: Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved program list Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list Erase Program List – Erases the program list and turns off program play Displaying and switching subtitles DVD-Video DivX ENTER 2 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the program list. After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/ track, the step number automatically moves down one. • To insert a step into the program list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move down one. • To delete a step from the program list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR. Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback.2 Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options. SUBTITLE • MAIN SUB + Select/change the subtitle language. The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. • To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR. 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/ folders/tracks. PLAY 4 Play the program list. Program play remains active until you cancel program play, erase the program list, eject the disc or switch off the recorder. Tip • To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE. • During program play, press to skip to the next program step. Note 1 When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. 2 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. • To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 131. 93 En 07 Playback HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks L+R – Both channels (default) L – Left channel only R – Right channel only DVD-Video DivX When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback.1 CD Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options. Video CD WMA/MP3 Stereo – Stereo (default) 1/L – Left channel only 2/R – Right channel only AUDIO • MAIN SUB + Change the audio soundtrack. The current audio language is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. Super VCD • The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. 1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default) 1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel 1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel 2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo 2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel 2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel • Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/ receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. Switching camera angles Switching audio channels DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 For HDD2 and VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or both (L+R).3 When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. DVD-Video Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see Angle Indicator on page 133). • ANGLE Switch the camera angle. • The angle number is displayed on-screen. MAIN SUB + • If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. AUDIO • MAIN SUB + Press repeatedly to display/switch the audio channel. The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated onscreen. Note 1 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. • To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 131. 2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 133). 3 • When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 131) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. • When playing a Dolby Digital source, you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer—see Dual mono setting on page 32. 94 En Playback 07 You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded or the HDD. DISPLAY • Display/change the on-screen information. • Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc). Shows recording restrictions for the current channel program Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD button to switch between the two kinds of display. The example displays below show high-speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback. Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Stop Hi-Speed Copy HDD DVD 0h08m left HDD Remain –h––m Stop DVD-RW Video Relative playback position ABC Pr 1 Stereo Copy Once : Comedy shows Indicates copy-protected material Indicates a multi-angle scene Play DVD-R Video Title Name 3–2 0. 00. 15 Chapter Time 0. 00. 21 Chapter Total 0h01m52s 4.32Mbps ! : 21/11 Football match Indicates the data transfer rate • See Switching camera angles on page 94 for more on multi-angle scene switching. • When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only. • During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed. Remain 0h52m Stop Recording time 0h35m Tip DVD-RW Video Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) Remain 10h35m Chase Play Rec Rem. DVD Mode • To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears. HDD and removable disc activity display Resume XP (1h00m/DVD) Finalized English Displaying disc information onscreen • The Video mode disc displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. • The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12 cm / 4.7 GB disc at the displayed record setting. • Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD. • The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused. • Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV program contains copy control information. 95 En 08 Editing Chapter 8 Editing Editing options The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types. HDD DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RW DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM (VR mode) Original Play List Create (page 98) Play (page 98) Erase (page 98) Edit > Title Name (page 99) Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 100) Edit > Erase Section (page 100) Edit > Divide (page 101) Edit > Chapter Edit (page 101) Edit > Set Genre (page 102) Edit > Lock (page 103) Edit > Move (page 103) Edit > Combine (page 104) Genre Name (page 104) Multi-Mode (page 105) Undo (page 105) *1 *1 *1 DVD-R/-RW only 96 En Editing 08 HDD/DVD • The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD-R/ -RW discs, DVD+R/+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video content on the internal hard disk drive. Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens. • If you are editing a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVDRAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting Play List from the view options panel (press , then select Play List from the view options, then Play List). English The Disc Navigator screen Important Disc Navigator (DVD) • Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 134. Style 101 4 Titles 4 Titles PlayList 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 9 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 8 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Original Original 2h00m(1.0G) MENU 1h00m(1.0G) • During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator HDD SP Remain 0h30m for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be played. 1 Select the HDD or DVD. 2 Display the Disc Navigator screen. Playback will automatically stop when you do this. • The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu. View options panel Title list Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 9 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 8 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Recent first 2h00m(1.0G) All Genres Available recording time Selected title SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles HDD SP Remain 30h30m 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM MENU 1h00m(1.0G) ENTER Press to display the command menu panel. Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the menus. PREV Press to exit the Disc Navigator. Some editing commands ask you whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing). Frame accurate editing is very precise. The edit point is accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use the high-speed copy function to make a Video mode DVD. Video mode compatible editing is less precise. The edit point you choose will only be accurate to within 0.5 to 1 second. On the other hand, these edit points will be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW. 1h00m(1.0G) Title thumbnail Title information Command menu panel • DISC NAVIGATOR Editing accuracy DISC NAVIGATOR • • Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played. 3 HDD/DVD 1h00m(1.0G) HDD genres The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize your HDD video content you can assign different genres to titles. There are 14 genres in total, including ten userdefinable ones that you can name as you like. NEXT When in the title list, press to display the previous/next page if there are more titles than can be displayed. DISPLAY • Press to change the title information displayed in the title list. 97 En Editing 08 Create Erase DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it. Use this function to erase unwanted titles. Before you can use this command, make sure that the Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the left. When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video mode DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.1 ENTER 1 panel. Select ‘Create’ from the command menu Disc Navigator (DVD) 0Titles No title Play Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Edit Play List Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not result in any more free space on the disc. ENTER 1 Highlight the title you want to erase. 2h00m(1.0G) Create ENTER Undo 1h00m(1.0G) DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m 2 panel. Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu ENTER 3 ENTER 2 Select an original title to add to the Play List. Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as necessary to the Play List. Play Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. Tip • You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER. DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD Use this function to start playback of a title. ENTER 1 Highlight the title you want to play. ENTER 2 Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel. Playback of the title you selected starts. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles 9 Edit 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 8 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Recent first 2h00m(1.0G) Genre Name All Genres HDD SP Remain 30h30m 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP Play 11/29Mon 7:00PM SP 1h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mode 1h00m(1.0G) Note 1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers. 98 En Editing 08 Title Name You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/ +RW discs. 4 Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. • To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN. English ENTER DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD ENTER 1 rename). Highlight the title you want to name (or ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the command menu panel. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr Title 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon name SP Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) Set Thumbnail 4 Titles 9 20:00 20:00 FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 Erase Edit Section PrDivide 9 SP Chapter Edit 2h00m(1.0G) SetMulti-Mode Genre Recent first 8 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 Genre Name Lock Pr 7 All Genres SP 1h00m(1.0G) Cancel Cancel 7 19:00 19:00 HDD SP MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(1.0G) Remain 30h30m ENTER Input a name for the selected title. Input Title Name 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP CAPS small ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ; AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I # DN O OOO 0 1 2 3 4 5 + – /@ [ \ § 2 3 ´ µ¶ · c £ OK Clear O ø ß$% = > _ & ± { _| } ~ ¡ – ® ˚ 1 3 /2 /4 ¿ ` UUUUY 6 7 8 9 < ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ¨ © a– << ¬ ¸ 1 –o 1/4 << 3 Space • A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the / buttons to change the cursor position. • Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lowercase, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (/ ). • You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). • For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 99 En Editing 08 Set Thumbnail Erase Section HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in that title. Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. ENTER ENTER 1 Highlight the title you want to change the thumbnail picture for. 1 Highlight the title containing the section you want to erase. ENTER ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command menu panel. The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you can find the frame you want. 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the command menu panel. ENTER HDD only: Select the type of edit. 3 Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 10Titles ! 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr 4Title SPnameSP 11/29Mon 2ch Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) Set Thumbnail 4 Titles 9 20:00 20:00 FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP Chapter Edit 2h00m(1.0G) SetMulti-Mode Genre Recent first 8 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 19:00 19:00 MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 All Genres DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Erase Edit Section Divide Genre Name Lock Pr 7 SP Cancel Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) 7 HDD SP Remain 30h30m Pr 2 Video Mode Compatible Editing SP 1h00m(1.0G) 3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set. Set Thumbnail (HDD) 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 00.00.09.15 Play Pause Frame Accurate Editing • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 97. 4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then press ENTER. The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of the section. OK OK Exit Exit Erase Section (HDD) 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP You can also use the chapter and time search features (press PLAY MODE), and the CM SKIP buttons. Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 00.00.09.15 Play Pause ENTER 4 From Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen. To Exit ENTER 5 Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 100 En Editing 08 5 ENTER Press to divide the title at the current playback position. ENTER 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds). ! English ENTER 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel,. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. Divided titles cannot be combined. OK? Yes No Divide Chapter Edit HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be recombined into one again. DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing. ENTER 1 Highlight the title you want to divide. 1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you want to edit. ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command menu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. ! ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command menu panel. ENTER DVD RECORDER 3 Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. HDD only: Select the type of edit. ! DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing Video Mode Compatible Editing • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 97. Frame Accurate Editing 4 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the place you want to divide the title. • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 97. 4 Divide Title (HDD) 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP Rec. time 2h00m Select the command you want: • Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter, then press ENTER. 10–1 00.00.09.15 Play Pause Divide Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Cancel Rec. time Chapters 1–1 1h00m 5 0.00.00 Play Exit Divide Erase/Move Combine You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or 99 chapters per HDD title). 101 En 08 Editing • Erase1/Move2 – Erase or move chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER. Select whether you want to erase or move the chapter. Set Genre HDD Use this command to assign a genre to a title. Move command only: Select the destination for the chapter, and press ENTER. ENTER 1 Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Erase 1h00m Rec. time Move 0h01m Chapter Cancel 001 002 003 004 005 ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the command menu panel. Exit Divide Erase/Move Combine • Combine3 – Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr Title 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon nameSP Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) Set Thumbnail 4 Titles 9 Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 8 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 7 19:00 19:00 MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 Pr 9 1h00m Genre Name Lock Pr 7 All Genres 1 2 3 4 5 SP Cancel Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) HDD SP Remain 30h30m Exit Divide Erase/Move Combine SP Chapter Edit 2h00m(1.0G) SetMulti-Mode Genre Recent first 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Rec. time Erase Edit Section Divide 20:00 20:00 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(1.0G) ENTER ENTER 5 Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. 3 Select a genre for the title. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr Title 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon nameSP 4 Titles 9 20:00 20:00 FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 8 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 Recent first No Category Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) Set Thumbnail Movies Erase Edit Section Sport Edit Chapter Pr 9Children SP Divide Other 2h00m(1.0G) SetMulti-Mode Genre Free1 Genre Name Lock Free2 All Genres HDD SP Remain 30h30m Pr 7 SP Cancel Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) 7 19:00 19:00 MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(1.0G) Note 1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. 2 VR mode Play List only. 3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. 102 En Editing 08 Move HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only Original only Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles. You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later. English Lock ENTER 1 Highlight the title you want to move. Important • You can’t undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command menu panel. Disc Navigator (DVD) 1 Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock). 10Titles 1 11/29 MON MON 7:00PM 7:00PM 11/29 Play 11/29Mon 7:00PM 7:00PM 2ch 2ch SP 11/29Mon SP Title name 2 12/2 THU 10:00PM Divide 12/2Thu 10:00PM 7ch SP Erase 2h00m(1.0G) Set Thumbnail 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Erase EditSection ENTER Play List 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command menu panel. 3 12/3 FRI 8:00PM 12/3Fri 8:00PM 9ch 101 12/3 FRI 11:00PM 12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m 10Titles SP 1h00m(1.0G) 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr Title 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon nameSP Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) Set Thumbnail 4 Titles 9 20:00 20:00 FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 8 Erase Edit Section Divide Pr 9 Recent first 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 19:00 19:00 MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 All Genres ENTER SP Chapter Edit 2h00m(1.0G) SetMulti-Mode Genre 3 Select a new position for the title. Genre Name Lock Pr 7 SP Cancel Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) 7 HDD SP Remain 30h30m SP Cancel Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) 4 Disc Navigator (HDD) Chapter Edit 2h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mode Move Genre Name Combine Pr 2 Title to move SP 1h00m(1.0G) An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. Disc Navigator (DVD) 11 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles 2 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 3 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 4 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Play List 2h00m(1.0G) MENU 1h00m(1.0G) DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m 1h00m(1.0G) Insert position After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is displayed. 103 En Editing 08 Combine Genre Name DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only HDD Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one. Use this command to rename one of the ten userdefinable genres (Free 1 to Free 10). ENTER 1 Highlight the title you want to combine. This title will remain in the same place after combining with another title. ENTER 1 Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command menu panel. Disc Navigator (HDD) ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the command menu panel. 101 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles 9 Edit 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 8 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Recent first Disc Navigator (DVD) 11 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM SP Title name All Genres Erase Set Thumbnail 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles 20:00 FRI 3/12 Divide 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP Chapter Edit 2h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mode Move Genre Name Combine Play List 3 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 4 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Multi-Mode Multi-Mode 0G) HDD SP Remain 30h30m Erase EditSection 2 2h00m(1.0G) Genre Name 1h00m(1.0G) Cancel Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m ENTER 2 names. 1h00m(1.0G) Select one of the user-definable genre Disc Navigator (HDD) ENTER 3 Select another title to combine with the first. This title will be appended to the first title selected. 101 Erase Free2 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles 9 2 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP Free3 Edit Free4 SP Free5 Pr 9 8 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 All Genres Free7 Name Genre Pr 7 SP Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) HDD SP Remain 30h30m 10Titles 23:00 FRI 3/12 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 2h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mode Free6 7 11 20:00 20:00 Recent first The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended to title 1: Disc Navigator (DVD) 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP Free1 11/29Mon SP 19:00 19:00 MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(1.0G) SP 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Play List 2h00m(1.0G) 3 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 4 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP ENTER MENU 3 Input a name for the genre. • The name can be up to 12 characters long. 1h00m(1.0G) DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m Input Genre Name 1h00m(1.0G) Free 1 DN O OOO 0 1 2 3 4 5 + – /@ [ c £ \ § 2 3 ´ µ¶ · ENTER 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. ! ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ; AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I # OK Clear øUUUUY ß$% 6 7 8 9 <= > _ & ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { _| } ~ ¡ ¨ © a– << ¬ – ® ˚ ¸ 1 –o 1/4 1/2 3/4 ¿ ` O << CAPS small Space OK to combine titles 1 and 3 ? Yes No ENTER 4 104 En Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and exit. Editing 08 Undo HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at once, for example. If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you can only undo the last edit you made)1. English Multi-Mode ENTER ENTER 1 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command menu panel. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 • Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu panel. • You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon SP Disc Navigator (DVD) Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles 9 20:00 20:00 FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 1 Edit Pr 9 Recent first SP 4 Titles 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 19:00 19:00 MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 Pr 7 All Genres SP Play List Pr 2 2h00m(1.0G) Create Multi-Mode 1h00m(1.0G) 7 HDD SP Remain 30h30m Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) Edit 2h00m(1.0G) Genre Name 8 0Titles 11/29 MON 7:00PM Play No title 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP Undo 1h00m(1.0G) SP 1h00m(1.0G) DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m ENTER 2 Select titles from the title list. Selected titles are marked with a . ENTER 3 Select the command that you want applied to all the marked titles. For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 Multi-Mode 23:00 FRI 3/12 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 FRI 3/12 Fri 3/12 SP Lock Unlock 22:00 22:00 THU 2/12 Thu 2/12 Change Genre Pr 9 Recent first SP 2h00m(1.0G) 8 All Genres Single Mode Pr 7 SP Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) 7 HDD SP Remain 30h30m • I can’t edit my disc! Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 20:00 20:00 19:00 19:00 When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the titles are no longer displayed, but the content remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once media; they can’t be erased or rewritten. 3Titles 4 Titles 9 Frequently asked questions • Why doesn’t the available recording time increase when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R? MON 29/11 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(1.0G) You may find that as the available recording time is reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no longer possible. This is because information about your edits requires a certain amount of disc space. As you edit, this information builds up, eventually preventing you from editing further. Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is automatically exited. Note 1 Except DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs. These have only one level of undo. 105 En 09 Copying and backup Chapter 9 Copying and backup Introduction Use the copying features of this recorder to: • Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD. • Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play in another player. • Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing. • Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on page 106 for detailed instructions. For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 107 for detailed instructions. Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum copying times on page 138 for more on copying times. If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is always done in real-time. When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 132). Restrictions on copying Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD. Some video material is copy-once protected. This means that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM-compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on page 76 for more on this). Only one instance of a copyonce protected title can be added to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copyonce protected). 106 En You can identify copy-once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark ( ! ) is shown. Copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. One Touch Copy * See also Copyright above. The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of where in the title you start the copy. HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in whatever recording mode is currently set. Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when trying to copy from the HDD. REC MODE 1 If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD, select a recording mode. Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title playing will not result in a better quality recording. ONE TOUCH COPY 2 Press during playback to copy the current title. The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied. Copying and backup 09 Copying to the HDD • The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours. • Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the title. • Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode disc. • Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original. Canceling One Touch Copy You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started. • If some part of the title being copied is copyprotected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied. ONE TOUCH COPY • Press and hold for more than a second. Copying is canceled and the video already copied is erased. • If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the precopy figure. English • High-speed copying is used when copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying. Using Copy Lists * See also Copyright on page 106. Notes on copying using One Touch Copy Copying to DVD • Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/ -RW or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied. • The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW. At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list, erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the actual content is not being altered. Copying from HDD to DVD • You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected. Important • A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-R/ -RW or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. • • The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. • The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System setting is changed (see Additional information about the TV system settings on page 134). Low resolution (SEP through LP modes1 ) widescreen material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. • When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high-speed copied to a Video mode disc. Please use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM. • Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be highspeed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM. • Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 148) will erase the Copy List. 1 Load a recordable DVD. • It is possible to complete the following steps without having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are slightly different. • If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the copy, make sure it is initialized before you start. • Titles over 8 hours cannot be copied to single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs for titles over 8 hours. • Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using One Touch Copy. Note 1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On). 107 En Copying and backup 09 2 HOME MENU • When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title if high-speed copying is possible. Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Select ‘HDD DVD’. If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 5 below. Depending on the title1, high-speed copying may not be possible to a Video mode disc. 6 Press to display the command menu panel. HDD DVD The Command Menu panel DVD/CD HDD Copy Disc Back-up 4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’ or ‘Continue Using Previous Copy List’. Recent first All Genres 1>2>3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WED MON S AT THU WED MON FRI WED 29/03 27/03 25/03 23/03 22/03 20/03 17/03 15/03 20:00 21:00 23:00 22:00 20:00 13:00 21:00 20:00 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP Pr 2 Pr 4 Pr 9 Pr 6 Pr 2 Pr 9 Pr 4 Pr 2 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Sports SP Pr 2 Copy List Total Current DVD Remain Continue Using Previous Copy List Create New Copy List 7 Wed29/03 Mon 27/03 S a t 25/03 Thu 23/03 Wed 22/03 Mon 20/03 F r i 17/03 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 Pr 4 Pr 9 Pr 6 Pr 2 Pr 9 Pr 4 Pr 2 Return Next 4.3G 4.3G Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen. Copy • If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List, skip to step 10 below. 8 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) Select Title 2 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) 1>2>3 Title Edit 1 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 2 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP Return • Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder. Next 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(2.0G) ENTER 5 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add). Copy 1>2>3 Select Title Recent first All Genres 4.3G 4.3G 8 To edit a title, highlight it using the / buttons, then press ENTER. 8 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) Copy List Total Current DVD Remain 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WED MON S AT THU WED MON FRI WED 29/03 27/03 25/03 23/03 22/03 20/03 17/03 15/03 20:00 21:00 23:00 22:00 20:00 13:00 21:00 20:00 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP Pr 2 Pr 4 Pr 9 Pr 6 Pr 2 Pr 9 Pr 4 Pr 2 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Sports SP Pr 2 Copy List Total Current DVD Remain Wed29/03 Mon 27/03 S a t 25/03 Thu 23/03 Wed 22/03 Mon 20/03 F r i 17/03 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 Pr 4 Pr 9 Pr 6 Pr 2 Pr 9 Pr 4 Pr 2 Return Copy Next 0.0G 4.3G 2 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) 1>2>3 Title Edit 1 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP Erase 2 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP Title Name Erase Section Move Preview Return Next Cancel 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(2.0G) Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink. There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to the Copy List if you are copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW: • When adding titles that contain copy-once protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added. Copy List Total Current DVD Remain 4.3G 4.3G A menu of editing commands appears: • Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 98). • Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see Title Name on page 99). • Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section on page 100). Note 1 • Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On). • LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off. • Bilingual recordings. • Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes. 108 En Copying and backup 09 • Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List. • Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see Divide on page 101). • Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into one (see Combine on page 104). • Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on page 101): • Divide – Divide a chapter into two. • Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the chapter order. • Combine – Combine two chapters into one. • Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on page 100). • Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy (see Recording Mode on page 110). • Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied when copying from HDD to Video mode DVD (see Bilingual on page 110). ENTER Display the command menu panel. ENTER 10 Select ‘Next’ to proceed. Copy 1>2>3 1 2 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP Return Next 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(2.0G) Copy List Total Current DVD Remain Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying. Copy HDD DVD (Video Mode) 1>2>3 Start Copy HDD DVD-RW Video Mode Return Recording Mode Copy Time 0h 16m Input Disc Name Recording Mode Disc Name High-Speed Finalize Finalize Off Start Copy Copy List Total Current DVD Remain 4.3G 4.3G • If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total bar will be purple. • The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is already full. Important • The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when a finalized Video mode disc or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy function, however (See One Touch Copy on page 106). • The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. 2 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) Title Edit ENTER 11 Copying from DVD to HDD • Cancel – Exit the menu. Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing. 9 • Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a Video mode DVD or DVD+R after copying.2 Select a title menu style from the following screen. English • Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 103). 4.3G 4.3G There are several options available from the next screen: • The Copy List will be erased if: – any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited. – the disc tray is opened. – playback is switched between Play List and Original. – the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized. – the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 148). • It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC. • Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 110).1 • Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that of naming titles; see Title Name on page 99.) Note 1 Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using high-speed copy. 2 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized. 109 En Copying and backup 09 1 HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu. Recording Mode ENTER ENTER Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’. 2 1 Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 3 Select a Copy List type. • Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder. ENTER 2 • XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN2 – The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.) ENTER 4 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add). Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink. If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting (MN1 to MN323 or LPCM) from the Recording Quality box that appears. ENTER 5 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel to proceed to the title edit screen. • Optimized2,4 – The recording quality is automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space available on the disc. Copying is carried out in realtime. ENTER 6 Select a title to edit. A menu appears of Copy List editing commands: • Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 98). • Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 103). • Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List. • Cancel – Exit the menu. Select a recording mode for the copy. • High-Speed Copy1 – The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. Bilingual Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing. ENTER 1 Select the title containing the audio you want to change. ENTER 7 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel to proceed to the copy options screen. • Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 110). ENTER 2 Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command menu panel. ENTER ENTER 8 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying. 3 Select a bilingual audio option. Note 1 When copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original. 2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video)) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 132. 3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available. 4 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. 110 En Copying and backup * See also Copyright on page 106. This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of a finalized Video mode disc or DVD+R/+RW. The data is copied first to the hard disk drive1, then on to another recordable DVD disc. 5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD. * If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the backup process. English Using disc backup 09 Disc Back-up Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive. Please eject the disc and load a HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’ from 1 the Home Menu. ENTER 2 Select a backup option. Start new disc back-up Resume writing date Erase back-up date There are three backup options: • Start new disc backup – Start making a backup of a disc. • Resume writing data – Record the backup data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD. • Erase backup data – Erase the backup data on the HDD. recordable disc Start Cancel You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup. • If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot undo the finalization later. • Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc you’re backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc. • DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/+RW discs. 6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc. Disc Back-up Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive. The disc contents will be overwritten. 3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of. You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs). Disc Back-up No Disc. Please load a disc to be backed-up. Start Cancel Start Cancel • To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY. • You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can reinitialize it in order to make it usable again—see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 85.) 7 After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc, you can select whether to make another backup of the same data or exit. ENTER 4 OK to start? Select ‘Start’. Disc Back-up Disc Back-up Read from disc and save to HDD. Disc back-up finished. Start reading? To make another back-up copy, please load a recordable disc. Start Cancel • To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY. • You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. Start Cancel • Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another backup copy, return to step 6 above. Note 1 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD. 111 En 09 Copying and backup 8 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the HDD, you can delete it now. Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to). Disc Back-up The backed-up data is still on the HDD. Erasing it will increase the free space available. OK to Erase? Yes No • If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD, you can make backup copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu. 112 En Using the Jukebox 10 Chapter 10 The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CDR/-RW/-ROM or a USB device. Once on the HDD, you can name albums, assign them a genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to play to Jump. Copying music to the HDD The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD audio is copied in real-time, while WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. All tracks are copied from each CD1 as an album. • If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play. Copying files from a USB device to the HDD DVR-640H-AV only You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD. 1 2 Connect the USB device. HOME MENU Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu. WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on page 114). 3 Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order they appear on the CD. When copying CD audio, you can copy them in some other order using the program play mode. See Program play on page 93 for how to do this. 4 Select ‘Copy Album’ from the command menu panel. ENTER Select ‘Listen to Music from USB Device’. ENTER Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD disc. Important English Using the Jukebox ENTER 5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to the HDD. • While copying CD audio, no other recorder operation is possible. • Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device are copyable/displayable. • When copying CD audio, scheduled timer recordings will not start until copying is complete. • Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully. 1 2 Load the CD you want to copy to the HDD. HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu. Playing music from the Jukebox You can select albums or individual tracks from the Jukebox to play.2 1 HOME MENU Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’. On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD are copied to the HDD. • You can also start copying by starting playback of the CD (including program play) and then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY. • To cancel copying an audio CD, press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. • To cancel copying a WMA/MP3 disc, press ENTER. ENTER 2 Select a Jukebox option. • Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs that have been copied to the HDD. • Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit – Listen to WMA or MP3 files that have been stored on the HDD. • Listen to Music from USB Device – Listen to music from an external USB device. Note 1 The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps Dolby Digital. 2 The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD. 113 En Using the Jukebox 10 • Genre ENTER 3 Select what you want to play. The screen below shows CD albums stored on the HDD: Jukebox Album name Best Album1 4 Album2 1 Erase 5 Album3 2 Edit 6 Album4 3 Play Mode 7 Album5 4 8 Album6 5 9 Album7 10 Album8 By number All Genres HDD 4 Jazz 6 Classical Album6 5 7 Album7 8 Album8 Remain 60h30m Info for selected album Genre Name 6 7 Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep Total 12 1.14.58 1-10 classical 0.03.58 All Genres – All albums are displayed. Genre Name 7 1-10 Play Mode Album5 HDD 0.03.58 Edit Pop 5 Genres All All Genres Remain 60h30m 6 Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical Total 12 1.14.58 Erase 2 3 Play ALL Play 1 Album4 10Albums 3 ALL 4 Genre Rock Jukebox 10Albums 12/1 1 Album1 Sort order 2 Album2 All Genres By First number New No Category 3 Album3 Genre – Only albums in the selected genre are displayed. Playback status • If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are not set to Jump will play. • If you want to start playback from a selected track in an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press to enter the track list then select a track to play. Editing Jukebox albums A number of commands are available for editing and changing the playback behaviour of albums. 1 HOME MENU Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu. • Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page. ENTER 2 Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’ or ‘Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit’. Changing the album view ENTER 1 From the album list, display the view options menu panel. ENTER 3 Select what you want to edit. ENTER 4 Select an edit function from the command menu panel. • Erase – Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an album are selected, the whole album is erased). ENTER 2 Select a view option. Jukebox 10Albums 1 Sort order 2 By number Recent New First ByFirst favorite 3 By album 4 Genre 12/1 Album1 Album2 ALL Play 1 Erase Album3 2 Edit Album4 3 Play Mode Genres 5 All All Genres Cancel 6 Album5 4 Album6 5 7 Album7 8 Album8 HDD Remain 60h30m Genre Name • Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the genre for the album. 6 7 Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical Total 12 1.14.58 1-10 0.03.58 • Sort order • Play Mode – Change the playback order for albums and tracks. By favorite – Most often listened to music appears at the top of the list. • Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters for a genre. See page Title Name on page 99 for how to enter names. Note 1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback. En • Edit > Jump Set1 – Set a track to jump so that it doesn't play (choose this command again to cancel the Jump setting). By number – Albums are listed by the album number. By album – Albums are listed alphabetically. 114 • Edit > Edit Title – Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the album. See page Title Name on page 99 for how to enter names. The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) 11 Chapter 11 From the Photo Viewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CDROM/R/RW, or on a USB-equipped digital camera.1 You can also import files and save them to the recorder’s HDD or a DVD-R/RW disc. Locating JPEG picture files 1 HOME MENU Select ‘Photo Viewer’ from the Home Menu. English The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) ENTER 3 Select the folder containing the files you want to view, copy or edit. Currently selected folder in folder list PhotoViewer File Date/Time HDD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 001. 12/12 TUE File information Currently selected thumbnail 1920 x 1440 Size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 002. 12/13 WED 003. 12/14 THU 004. 12/15 FRI 005. 12/16 SAT ENTER 2 Select the location of the files you want to view or edit. 006. 12/17 SUN 007. 12/18 MON 008. 12/19 TUE 1/2 Press ENTER to display the menu. Press RETURN to go back to folder selection. 1/3 View/Edit photos on the HDD Pages in folder list View photos on a CD/DVD Incompatible/ unknown file Pages in file view View photos on a USB device Copy photos from a USB device • View/Edit photos on the HDD – View or edit photos already stored on the recorder’s HDD. • View photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, or DVD-R/RW. • View photos on a USB device – View photos on a digital camera (or other USB device) connected to the USB port. • Copy photos from a USB device – Copy all photos on a connected USB device to the HDD. • If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created disc compatibility on page 48). Playing a slideshow ENTER 1 Select a folder from the folder list. The first nine images from the selected folder are displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen. • The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder to load the file. • To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to step 4 after pressing ENTER. ENTER 2 Select ‘File Selection’ from the menu. The first thumbnail image is highlighted. • You can also select a folder, then press to get to the thumbnail view area. Note 1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see the following page). 115 En The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) 11 • To get back to the folder list, press RETURN (or when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted). ENTER 3 Select a thumbnail. • Use the and buttons to display the previous/ next page of thumbnails. ENTER 4 Select ‘Start Slideshow’ from the menu. • You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY to start playing the slideshow. Zooming an image During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed. 1 ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2 x zoom and 4 x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed onscreen. ENTER • Use PREV / NEXT to display the previous/ next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow. 2 • Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and right. Rotating an image • Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. This is normal. • During playback of the slideshow you can listen to WMA/MP3 files in the Slideshow genre (see Editing Jukebox albums on page 114) Use to move the zoomed area. You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. ANGLE • MAIN SUB + Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90º. Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90º. STOP 5 Press to return to the thumbnail view area. • You can also use the RETURN button. RETURN 6 Press to return to the folder view area. • With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted, you can use the button. • To exit the Photo Viewer, press HOME MENU. Importing files to the HDD You can import files and save them on to the HDD2 from a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print them out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer. Reloading files from a disc or USB device If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function. ENTER 1 Select the location of folders/files you want to import. To import a whole folder, press ENTER here and skip to step 4 below. ENTER • To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117. 1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’). 2 ENTER Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc or connected USB device. It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in the images.1 ENTER 2 3 Select ‘File Selection’ from the menu. Select a file to import, then press ENTER.. • To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders below. Note 1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Photo Viewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the Photo Viewer again, it will resume reloading if from a CD or DVD.) 2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/RW. 116 En The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) 11 4 Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the menu. PhotoViewer PhotoViewer File Date/Time File Date/Time CD/DVD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 1 001. 12/12 TUE 2 004. 12/15 FRI 4 5 7 8 003. 12/14 THU 004. 12/15 FRI Copy to HDD Print 6 006. 12/17 SUN 006. 12/17 SUN 1/2 Press ENTER to display the menu. Press RETURN to go back to folder selection. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 008. 12/19 TUE 008. 12/19 TUE 1/2 2 007. 12/18 MON 9 Cancel 007. 12/18 MON 1920 x 1440 Size 1 005. 12/16 SAT Multi-Mode 005. 12/16 SAT Multi-Mode 002. 12/13 WED 3 Start Slideshow Copy all to HDD 002. 12/13 WED 003. 12/14 THU 001. 12/12 TUE 1920 x 1440 Size HDD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM English • To remove a file/folder from the list, select Cancel Selection from the menu. ENTER Press STOP or ENTER to display the menu and cancel selection. 1/3 1/3 4 Display the command menu. ENTER ENTER 5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel. • The files will be copied to the HDD with the same folder structure as the original. • Importing to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder). Selecting multiple files or folders ENTER 5 Select the command you want to apply to all the selected items. Importing files from a USB device Use this feature to copy all the files on a connected USB device to this recorder’s HDD. The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files at once for importing or editing. Important • After backing up the pictures on your USB device to HDD, we recommend verifying that they have been recorded properly before deleting anything from the camera. ENTER 1 Select the folder containing the files you want to import. ENTER ENTER 2 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the menu. PhotoViewer Folder 1 Select ‘Copy photos from a USB device’ from the main Photo Viewer menu. HDD 12/13 WED ENTER 001. 12/12 TUE 1 2 Start Slideshow 002. 12/13 WED 003. 12/14 THU 004. 12/15 FRI 4 5 007. 12/18 MON New Folder 6 Folder Options Copy to DVD 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN 2 3 File selection 7 8 Multi-Mode 9 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • While the files are being imported, any timer programs set to start will not begin, and no other operation is possible. Cancel 008. 12/19 TUE 1/2 Use [][] to select, then press [] to select file. Press ENTER to display menu. 1/3 ENTER 3 To add a file/folder to the list, select it, then choose ‘Select’ from the menu. A checkbox mark () is shown by the item you selected. • You can also select a file or folder and press STOP to add it to the list. 117 En The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) 11 Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW Editing files on the HDD This feature allows you just to copy some of the files stored on HDD to a DVD. There are a number of commands you can use to edit and organize your pictures stored on the HDD. A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD player (copying selected files doesn’t automatically finalize the disc). Important Creating a new folder 1 ENTER From the folder list, display the menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘New Folder’. The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the name F_number. • A maximum of 99 titles can be recorded. • Slideshows can contain up to 99 files. If there are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple slideshows are created on the disc. PhotoViewer Folder HDD 12/13 WED 001. 12/12 TUE 1 2 4 5 003. 12/14 THU 004. 12/15 FRI New Folder 6 Folder Options Copy to DVD 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN 7 8 Multi-Mode 9 Cancel 007. 12/18 MON 1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. 3 File selection Start Slideshow 002. 12/13 WED • If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the slideshow will become unplayable but the free space will not increase. 008. 12/19 TUE Use [][] to select, then press [] to select file. Press ENTER to display menu. 1/2 1/3 • There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD. ENTER 2 Select ‘View/Edit Photos on the HDD’ from the menu. Erasing a file or folder ENTER ENTER 3 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. • Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. • To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117. 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to erase. • To erase multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117. • Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it. Please be careful! • You can’t erase files that have been locked. ENTER 4 Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the menu. • Folders containing locked files can’t be erased. Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased. ENTER 5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR. File names will be PHOT number. • Note that during copying, any timer programs set to start will not begin, and no other operation is possible. • While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can press ENTER to cancel. ENTER 2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’. PhotoViewer File Date/Time HDD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 001. 12/12 TUE 1 004. 12/15 FRI 4 5 007. 12/18 MON Print 6 Copy to DVD Multi-Mode 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN 3 Start Slideshow File Options 002. 12/13 WED 003. 12/14 THU 1920 x 1440 Size 2 7 8 9 Cancel 008. 12/19 TUE 1/2 118 En Press ENTER to display the menu. Press RETURN to go back to folder selection. 1/3 The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) 11 ENTER Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’. PhotoViewer File Date/Time 001. 12/12 TUE 003. 12/14 THU 004. 12/15 FRI 2 4 5 7 8 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN 1920 x 1440 Size 1 002. 12/13 WED 007. 12/18 MON ENTER 5 3 Start Slideshow Erase File Options Copy Print Rename File6 Copy to DVD Lock Multi-Mode 9 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel. • Copying to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD. Cancel Cancel 008. 12/19 TUE Press ENTER to display the menu. Press RETURN to go back to folder selection. 1/3 Naming files and folders 1 Select the file or folder you want to rename. You can’t rename files that have been locked. ENTER 4 Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s) HDD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 1/2 4 to. Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel. • You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm. 2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’. 3 Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’. PhotoViewer File Date/Time Copying files HDD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 001. 12/12 TUE 003. 12/14 THU 004. 12/15 FRI 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. • Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. 2 4 5 7 8 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN ENTER 3 Start Slideshow Erase File Options Copy Print 6 Rename File Copy to DVD Lock Multi-Mode 9 Cancel Cancel 007. 12/18 MON 008. 12/19 TUE 1/2 • To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117. 1920 x 1440 Size 1 002. 12/13 WED ENTER 2 English ENTER 3 Press ENTER to display the menu. Press RETURN to go back to folder selection. 1/3 4 Enter a new name for the file/folder. Filenames or Foldernames can be up to 64 characters long. Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’. Locking/Unlocking files ENTER 3 Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder Contents’. PhotoViewer File Date/Time HDD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 001. 12/12 TUE 2 4 5 002. 12/13 WED 003. 12/14 THU 004. 12/15 FRI 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN 007. 12/18 MON 7 1920 x 1440 Size 1 3 Start Slideshow Erase File Options Copy Print 6 Rename File Copy to DVD Lock Multi-Mode Cancel Cancel 008. 12/19 TUE 1/2 Press ENTER to display the menu. Press RETURN to go back to folder selection. Use the same process to both lock and unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the Photo Viewer with a padlock icon. ENTER 9 8 Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure and prevent them from being renamed. 1/3 1 Select the file(s) you want to lock (or unlock). • To lock/unlock multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117. 119 En The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) 11 ENTER ENTER 2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’. ENTER 3 Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’. PhotoViewer File Date/Time Tip HDD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 001. 12/12 TUE 004. 12/15 FRI 1 2 4 5 7 8 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN 1920 x 1440 Size 002. 12/13 WED 003. 12/14 THU 3 Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or ‘Cancel’ to cancel. • Once printing has started, you can cancel by pressing ENTER. 3 Start Slideshow Erase File Options Copy Print 6 Rename File Copy to DVD Lock Multi-Mode • Paper size and layout can be set; the options available depend on your printer—check the printer manual for details. 9 Cancel Cancel 007. 12/18 MON 008. 12/19 TUE Press ENTER to display the menu. Press RETURN to go back to folder selection. 1/2 1/3 Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them. Printing files Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB port will enable you to print out picture files1 stored on the HDD, or directly from a digital camera. Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder before starting. ENTER 1 Select the file(s) you want to print. • To print multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117. ENTER 2 Select ‘Print’ from the menu. PhotoViewer File Date/Time HDD Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 001. 12/12 TUE 2 4 5 004. 12/15 FRI 007. 12/18 MON Print 6 Copy to DVD Multi-Mode 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN 3 Start Slideshow File Options 002. 12/13 WED 003. 12/14 THU 1920 x 1440 Size 1 7 8 9 Cancel 008. 12/19 TUE 1/2 Press ENTER to display the menu. Press RETURN to go back to folder selection. 1/3 It takes a moment for the recorder to communicate with the printer. During this time you can press ENTER to cancel the print. Note 1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly. 120 En The PhotoViewer (DVR-440H-AV) 12 Chapter 12 From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW.1 Playing a slideshow English The PhotoViewer (DVR-440H-AV) ENTER Locating JPEG picture files HOME MENU Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the Home 1 Menu. 1 Select a folder from the folder list. The first nine images from the selected folder are displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen. • The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder to load the file. The first thumbnail image is highlighted. • You can also select a folder, then press to get to the thumbnail view area. ENTER 2 Select the folder containing the files you want to view. Currently selected folder in folder list • To get back to the folder list, press RETURN (or when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted). File information Currently selected thumbnail ENTER PhotoViewer File Date/Time Chair No. 2 24/01/2006 10:00AM 001. 12/12 TUE 1920 x 1440 Size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 002. 12/13 WED 003. 12/14 THU 004. 12/15 FRI 2 Select a thumbnail from which to start the sideshow. • Use the and buttons to display the previous/ next page of thumbnails. • You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY to start playing the slideshow. 005. 12/16 SAT 006. 12/17 SUN • Use PREV / NEXT to display the previous/ next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow. 007. 12/18 MON 008. 12/19 TUE 1/2 Pages in folder list Press ENTER to start slideshow. To return to folder list, press RETURN. Incompatible/ unknown file • Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and right. 1/3 • Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. This is normal. Pages in file view • If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 48 and PC-created disc compatibility on page 48). STOP 3 Press to return to the thumbnail view area. • You can also use the RETURN button. RETURN 4 Press to return to the folder view area. • With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted, you can use the button. • To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU. Note 1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see the following page). 121 En The PhotoViewer (DVR-440H-AV) 12 Zooming an image During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed. 1 ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2 x zoom and 4 x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. ENTER 2 Use to move the zoomed area. Rotating an image You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. ANGLE • MAIN SUB + Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90º. Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90º. 122 En The Disc Setup menu 13 Chapter 13 From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu: English The Disc Setup menu Lock Disc DVD (VR) DVD-RAM • Default setting: Off Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc. Basic settings Important Input Disc Name DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home 1 Menu. • A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home 1 Menu. ENTER 2 ‘Off’. Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock disc’ then ‘On’ or Disc Setup Basic Input Disc Name On Initialize Lock Disc Off Finalize Optimize HDD ENTER 2 Screen’. Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc Name’ > ‘Next Disc Setup Basic Input Disc Name Initialize Lock Disc Next Screen Finalize Optimize HDD Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off. Initialize settings DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM ENTER 3 Input a name for the disc. The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/ +RW. • See Title Name on page 99 for more on navigating the input screen. You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either VR mode or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 132). New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize them for VR mode recording.1 DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVDRAM disc, select VR mode. Note 1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording. 123 En 13 The Disc Setup menu See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 85 for detailed instructions. Important • Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours. During optimization, playback and recording are not possible. Finalize settings • Canceling optimization mid-way does not undo the optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly optimized. Finalize DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu for the disc. HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home 1 Menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then ‘Start’. Disc Setup Basic See Recording from a DV camcorder on page 83 for detailed instructions. Start Optimization Start Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Undo Finalize DVD-RW A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. 1 HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu. Initialize HDD HDD When your DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it. HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home 1 Menu. ENTER 2 ‘Start’. Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then ENTER 2 Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then ‘Start’. Disc Setup Optimize HDD Basic Initialize Finalize HDD As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented files. When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will automatically display a message recommending optimization. 124 En Initialize HDD Optimize HDD Initialize Start The Video Adjust menu 14 Chapter 14 Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording. English The Video Adjust menu Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. ENTER 2 Select ‘Detailed Settings’. Pr 1 Memory1 Detailed Settings Choosing a preset ENTER 1 HOME MENU With the recorder stopped, press to display the Home Menu. 3 Select the setting you want to adjust. Memory1 Prog. Motion Pr 1 Motion Still ENTER 2 PureCinma Select ‘Video Adjust’. 3-D Y/C ENTER 3 Select a preset. Auto1 Motion Still YNR Off Max CNR Off Max White AGC White Level Off Min Max Pr 1 Tuner Detailed Settings • Use the VIDEO IN button to switch between the builtin TV tuner and the external inputs. • Use the / buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: • Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts • VCR – suitable for video cassettes • DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and Laserdiscs • Memory1 – user preset 1 • Memory2 – user preset 2 • Memory3 – user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP). You can adjust the following settings: • Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. • PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually this is best left set to Auto; try switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural. • 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness / colour separation (NTSC video input only). • YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. • CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component. • White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level adjustment.1 • White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. • Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. • Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video input only). Note 1 When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted. 125 En The Video Adjust menu 14 • Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green. • Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear. ENTER 4 Adjust the currently selected setting. Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed Settings’. HOME MENU Press to exit. 5 You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip • To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Memory1 Detailed Settings 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. Memory1 Prog. Motion Motion PureCinma Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs. Still Auto1 YNR Off Max BNR Off Max MNR Off Max Detail Off Max White Level Min Max You can adjust the following settings: Choosing a preset • Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. HOME MENU With a disc playing (or paused), press to 1 display the Home Menu. • PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually this is best left set to Auto 1; try switching to Auto 2, On or Off if the picture appears unnatural. ENTER 2 Select ‘Video Adjust’. • YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. ENTER 3 Select a setting. TV Detailed Settings There are six presets available: • BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of flat colour, caused by MPEG compression). • MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG compression). • TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs • Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear. • PDP – suitable for plasma display screens • White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. • Professional – suitable for professional monitors • Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. • Memory1 – user preset 1 • Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video playback only). • Memory2 – user preset 2 • Memory3 – user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional). • Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of darker images. • Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green. • Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear. 126 En The Video Adjust menu 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. English 4 Use the / buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 14 Tip • To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. 127 En 15 The Initial Setup menu Chapter 15 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. • Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’. In the table below, the default option is marked with a •. Setting Options Explanation Auto Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically. Manual • If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set the time and date manually. Basic Clock Setting The clock must be set in order to use timer recording. Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input. 625 System • Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording. See also About the input line system on page 134 for more information on this setting. Power Save HELP Setting Setup Navigator 128 En Mode 1 Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna output when the recorder is in standby. Mode 2 No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in standby. Off • When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs. On • Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. Off Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually display the Help screen.) Start Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting up on page 59. The Initial Setup menu Setting 15 Explanation Auto Scan Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting option below. Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen. Download from TV If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel mapping screen appears, as above. See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more information. Manual CH Setting Next Screen Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel setting screen: • Change channel presets using the / buttons. • To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On. • Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country or region. • Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current channel preset. • To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then adjust the Level setting. • Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region. • The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the current channel preset. • If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On. Channel Swapping Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together. Select two presets to swap then press ENTER. Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input and the built-in TV tuner. Use the CH +/– buttons to change the preset. On the default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly. Tuner Auto Channel Setting English Options Video In/Out Input Colour System See also About the input colour system on page 135 for more information on this setting. Component Video Out Interlace • Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video. Progressive Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure. For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see AV1 Out below) must be set to something other than RGB. AV1 Out Video • Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video (compatible with all TVs). S-Video Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you are using a long SCART cable. RGB Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner and from external inputs is not output when the recorder is in TV mode. 129 En 15 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 148). The Component Video Out setting (See Component Video Out above) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB. AV2/L1 In Video • Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite video. S-Video Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-video. RGB Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB. Decoder Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting page 129.) When the Input Line System is set to 525 System, RGB cannot be selected. Even when set to RGB. depending on the connected device, the input signal may be composite video. NTSC on PAL TV On • NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs. Off Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible. Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 134 for related information. Audio In NICAM Select Tuner Level External Audio NICAM • Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. Regular Audio Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.) Normal • Standard setting. Compression Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion. Stereo • Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo. Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack. When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here. Bilingual Recording A/L • B/R Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in LPCM mode, from an external source. As above, but for right (B) channel recording. When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback. DV Input Stereo 1 • Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Stereo 2 Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Mix Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks. On • Activates the digital audio output. Off Deactivates the digital audio output. Audio Out Digital Out When set to Off, all the following Audio Out settings are grayed out. 130 En The Initial Setup menu 15 Options Explanation Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital • Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played. Dolby Digital PCM Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder. On • Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played. Off Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the analog audio outputs. DTS Out 96 kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio DRC English Setting 96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate. 96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played. MPEG Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being played. MPEG PCM • Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder. On Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume. Off • Switches off Audio DRC. Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer—see Dynamic Range Control on page 32. Language OSD Language English • Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays. Audio Language English • Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVDVideo playback. Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 135. Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference. Subtitle Language English • Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback. Other Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 135. Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference. Auto Language On • On this setting: • DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will play using that language, without subtitles. • Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with subtitles. Off Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language preferences. For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language. 131 En 15 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle Language • Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language. English Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English. available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD-Video menus. Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 135. Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language. Subtitle Display On • Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences. Off Select to switch off subtitle display. Assist Subtitle Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available. Some discs may override these settings. Recording Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32 and LPCM modes can be set. Off • Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set. See also Manual recording modes on page 139 for detailed information on manual recording levels. Optimized Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the recording will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the recording will start at MN1 and stop when all the available space is used up. Off • When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible. Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC. Set Thumbnail Auto Chapter (Video) 0 seconds • Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of the title. 30 seconds Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title. 3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into the title. No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off. 10 minutes • When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes. This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs. Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) DVD-RW Auto Init. 132 En No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off. 10 minutes • When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes. VR Mode • Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording when loaded into the recorder for the first time. Video Mode Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode recording. The Initial Setup menu 15 Options Explanation HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a Video mode DVD. Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a Video mode DVD as high-speed copy can be used. English Setting When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 130. Playback TV Screen Size 4:3 (Letter Box) • Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format presentation for widescreen material. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presentation for widescreen material. 16:9 Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3 material will look. Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override this setting. Still Picture Seamless Playback Field Produces a stable, generally shake-free image. Frame Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake. Auto • Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image. On Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit points. Off • You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Play List. This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback. Parental Lock Set Password In order to change the parental lock level or change the country/area code, set the password using this option. From the following screen, enter a four-digit number that will be your password. Change Password In order to change the password, first enter your existing password and then a new one from the following screen. Change Level From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level. Country Code From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a country/area code. Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 148. Angle Indicator On • A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video disc. Off Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing. On • The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen. Off Switches off the on-screen operation displays. Options On Screen Display 133 En 15 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Front Panel Display On • Off Explanation The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby. The front panel display is switched off in standby (although it still lights dimly when setting a timer recording). Remote Control Mode Recorder 1–3 If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to different (default: Recorder 1) IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID, press and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a recorder with the same ID. AV. Link This Recorder Only • Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are not passed through to the AV output. Pass Through Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is not passed through.) When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 128) to Off. DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX video compatibility on page 47 and DivX® VOD content on page 47. Set Preview (HDD only) Quick Preview • When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally from the beginning.) Normal The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title. Additional information about the TV system settings • You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc. About the input line system • When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (see below). This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input Colour System settings determine how the recorder treats incoming video signals from an external input or the built-in TV tuner. Please note the following points when changing the input line system: • When the current input is a built-in tuner channel preset, changing the input line system will usually also affect the input line system of the AV2 (INPUT 1/ DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder, then the L2 input is affected instead. • If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel STOP button then pressing OPEN/ CLOSE (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. • When you switch the Input Line System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the STOP button and OPEN/CLOSE buttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care. 134 En About NTSC on PAL TV Depending on the Input Line System setting and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. Input Line System NTSC on PAL Output when TV stopped 625 System Off PAL On PAL Off NTSC On PAL–60 525 System The Initial Setup menu 15 About the input colour system Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM n/a Auto Selecting other languages for language options English The available options of the Input Colour System setting depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below shows the different options available. ENTER 1 Select ‘Other’ from the language list. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. ENTER 525 System 2 Select the language you want. 3.58 NTSC Initial Setup PAL–60 OSD Tuner Audio Language Language Subtitle Language Number Auto Language Video In/Out Audio In Additional information about component video output If you switch the Component Video Out setting to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and hold the STOP button on the front panel, then press PLAY. This will set the recorder’s video output back to Interlace. DVD Menu Language Basic Audio Out Language Language English 0 5 1 4 DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display Recording Playback • Select by language name: Use the / buttons to change the language. • Select by code number: Press then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 146 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes. 135 En Additional information 16 Chapter 16 Additional information Using the TV remote control buttons Setting up the remote to control your TV The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table on the following page. Button What it does TV Press to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT Press to change the TV’s video input 1 TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels Switch on your TV. 2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. • If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the table, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 3 Point the remote towards your TV and press TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. 136 En Additional information 16 Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654, 655 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH/PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630, 657 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK&TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M-ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R-LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 MCMICHAEL 634 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654, 655 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 English TV Preset code list 137 En 16 Additional information Minimum copying times The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video. Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. 1 Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility. DVD disc type DVD-R / 4 x DVD-RW / 4 x DVD+R / 4 x DVD+RW / 4 x DVD-R / 8 x / 16 x DVD-RW / 6 x DVD+R / 8 x / 16 x DVD+RW / 8 x 3x 4x 6x *1 2 mins. 1.5 mins.*1 1.25 mins.*1 4 mins. *1 2.5 mins. 2 mins.*1 1.6 mins.*1 10 mins. 5 mins. *1 3.5 mins. 2.5 mins.*1 2.2 mins.*1 4h 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 6.3 mins. 5 mins. 4 mins. 3 mins. SP 2h 30 mins. 15 mins. 12.5 mins. 10 mins. 7.5 mins. 5.5 mins. XP 1h 60 mins. 30 mins. 25 mins. 20 mins. 15 mins. 11 mins. DVD-R / 1 x DVD-RW / 1 x DVD-RW / 2 x DVD-R DL DVD-RAM / 2 x DVD+R / 2.4 x DVD+RW / 2.4 x DVD+R DL DVD-RAM / 3 x DVD-RAM / 5 x 1x 2x 2.4 x SEP 10 h 6 mins. 3 mins. SLP 8 h 7.5 mins. EP 6h LP Rec mode Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. *1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied. Note 1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6 x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2 x speed). 138 En Additional information 16 The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Video mode On (HDD) Video mode (DVD), DVD+R/+RW Video mode Off (HDD) VR mode (DVD) Resolution*1 352 x 240 / 352 x 288 352 x 480 / 352 x 576 480 x 480 / 480 x 576 544 x 480 / 544 x 576 720 x 480 / 720 x 576 Level English Manual recording modes Rec. time Level Rec. time MN 1 802 mins. MN 1 *2,3 802 mins. MN 2 720 mins. MN 2 *2,3 720 mins. MN 3 600 mins. SEP MN 3 *2,3 600 mins. MN 4 480 mins. SLP MN 4 *3 480 mins. MN 5 420 mins. MN 5 *3 420 mins. MN 6 360 mins. 360 mins. MN 7 MN 8 MN 9 MN 10 MN 11 MN 12 MN 13 MN 14 MN 15 MN 16 MN 17 MN 18 MN 19 MN 20 MN 21 MN 22 MN 23 MN 24 MN 25 MN 26 MN 27 MN 28 MN 29 MN 30 MN 31 MN 32 LPCM 300 mins. 270 mins. 240 mins. 230 mins. 220 mins. 210 mins. 200 mins. 190 mins. 180 mins. 170 mins. 160 mins. 150 mins. 140 mins. 130 mins. 120 mins. 110 mins. 105 mins. 100 mins. 95 mins. 90 mins. 85 mins. 80 mins. 75 mins. 70 mins. 65 mins. 61 mins. 61 mins. MN 6 *3 MN 7 MN 8 MN 9 MN 10 MN 11 MN 12 MN 13 MN 14 MN 15 MN 16 MN 17 MN 18 MN 19 MN 20 MN 21 MN 22 MN 23 MN 24 MN 25 MN 26 MN 27 MN 28 MN 29 MN 30 MN 31 MN 32 LPCM EP LP SP XP 300 mins. 270 mins. 240 mins. 230 mins. 220 mins. 210 mins. 200 mins. 190 mins. 180 mins. 170 mins. 160 mins. 150 mins. 140 mins. 130 mins. 120 mins. 110 mins. 105 mins. 100 mins. 95 mins. 90 mins. 85 mins. 80 mins. 75 mins. 70 mins. 65 mins. 61 mins. 61 mins. Resolution*1 352 x 240 / 352 x 288 352 x 480 / 352 x 576 720 x 480 / 720 x 576 *1 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System. Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW. *3 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW. *2 • • • • Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format. When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space (equivalent to one recordable DVD). See also Recording on page 75. 139 En 16 Additional information Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. General 140 En Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray • Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 45). • Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). • Take out the disc and clean it (page 147). • Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder. Can’t play a disc • Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 45). • Take out the disc and clean it (page 147). • Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). • There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. • During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System different to the current recorder setting. • DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-once protected recordings will not play in this recorder. Can’t record a disc • Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 45). • Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 85). This can take up to 1 hour. No picture • Check that everything is connected properly (page 50). • Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input. • The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel STOP button then pressing PLAY. All settings are reset • If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. • Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord. Remote control does not work • If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use (page 17). • Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 134). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.) • Use the remote within its operating range (page 17). • Replace the batteries (page 17). No sound or sound is distorted • Make sure that the receiver subwoofer or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. • There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback. • DTS audio can only be played back if the recorder’s digital output is connected to the receiver subwoofer. If connected to your TV, your TV must have a DTS decoder for you to be able to enjoy DTS sound. • Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. • Check the audio cable connections (page 50). • If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs. Cannot switch a bilingual program • During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub channels are both output. Additional information Remedy The picture from the external input is distorted • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV. The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 134). (You can also change it by pressing the STOP button and OPEN/CLOSE on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.) English Problem 16 Screen is stretched vertically • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 133) is correct for the kind of TV you or horizontally have (see also page 139). • If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings. • This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. Can’t play a disc recorded using this recorder on another player • If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 84). •Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video mode and finalized. • If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 45). • Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM compatible players (page 76). • DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again. During playback the picture • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly. is dark or distorted Connect the recorder directly to your TV. Can’t record or does not record successfully • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD. • For a Video mode disc or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized. • Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc: – HDD: 999 titles – VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc – Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title – DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc) • Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected. • For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 123). • Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 134). • The power may have failed during recording. Timer program doesn’t record successfully • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner. • When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 76). • Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely. • The power may have failed during recording. After briefly unplugging or after a power failure the front panel display shows ‘-:--’ • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’ when a button is pressed • The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 81). 141 En 16 Additional information Problem Remedy Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a Video mode disc or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized. • Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc. • If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles may not decrease. • Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use. • If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch Copy will not work. • One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over 8 hours long when copying to DVD+R/ +RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL). • One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying to DVD+R/+RW. • One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD. Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD. • One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD. The picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working • Press STOP then try restarting playback. • Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold STANDBY/ON for 5 seconds until the power switches off. A device connected via USB • Check that it is a device that may be connected to this unit (digital camera, USB does to function. memory, memory card reader or printer). • Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length. • Check that the USB cable is inserted fully. • Check that the USB device is powered on. • Only the first digital camera, USB memory or memory card reader connected is readable by this unit. Unplug multiple devices and connect the device you want to use first. If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. 142 En Additional information 16 The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. Message Explanation/Action • Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it. • Incompatible region number. The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play. • Cannot record any more titles. • No more space for file management data. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine chapters. • This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization. The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the finalization in order to recording/editing. • Cannot play this disc. • This disc cannot be recorded. • Cannot read the CPRM information. • Could not record the information to the disc. • Cannot edit. • Could not initialize disc. • Could not complete finalization successfully. • Could not undo finalization successfully. • Could not successfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center. • Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. • Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM compatible. • Cannot record this content using Video mode recording. • This video cannot be recorded to DVD+R/+RW. The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording. • This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. • Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center. • Repairing disc. • Repairing the HDD. During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored. • Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost. • Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLAY to clear message. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a Pioneer authorized service center. • There is no DV input or the input signal is unrecordable. No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder. • HDD optimization is recommended. This can be done using Disc Setup. The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording performance. English On-screen displays and recorder displays 143 En 16 144 En Additional information Message Explanation/Action • Please perform HDD optimization. This can be done using Disc Setup. The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain performance. • The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized. Please optimize again. If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize again. • This channel’s TV system is different from the recorder’s setting. The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from the TV system settings of this recorder. • Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear message. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder. • Playback has stopped because the TV system is different than the recording. During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop automatically. No DV camcorder connected. The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched off. You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time. This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder. Cannot operate the DV camcorder. This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back on again. Could not operate the DV camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder. The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder. The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode. Searching for printer. Please wait a moment. This message is displayed when the recorder is scanning for a connected printer, or when the printer is not yet ready for printing. If there is no printer connected, please connect one. The printer is not ready or there is no printer connected. Please check the printer status. This message is displayed when communication could not be established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause. Printing has stopped because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, select “Yes” to resume printing. Select “No” to cancel the print job. See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of print errors. The print job has been canceled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, reconnect the printer and start the printing job again. See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of print errors. Additional information 16 About DV DVR-640H-AV only: Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals. “i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks. • This recorder is only compatible with DV-format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible. • Digital camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16-bit / 48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit / 32 kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on page 130). English • It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN jack. • Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz). • You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time to this recorder. • Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source component pauses playback or plays an unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the source component, or the DV cable is disconnected. • You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN jack. • The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output functionality. Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen. 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The program is presented correctly on either setting. 4:3 When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The program is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Your TV will determine how the picture is presented— check the manual that came with the TV for details. 145 En 16 Additional information Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laotian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk 146 En Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Additional information When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. English Handling discs 16 Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a circular motion. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. Hints on installation For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do not load more than one disc into the recorder. Do... Damaged discs Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder. Use in a well-ventilated room. Don’t... Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heatgenerating appliances. Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. 147 En Additional information 16 Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. Specifications Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference—especially if the television uses an indoor antenna. General Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam. Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unit’s feet. Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/ ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording— discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold STOP and press STANDBY/ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. 148 En Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz / 60 Hz Power consumption DVR-640H-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 W DVR-440H-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 W Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.61 W (Front panel display: off) Weight DVR-640H-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 kg DVR-440H-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 kg Dimensions DVR-640H-AV . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 69 mm (H) x 318 mm (D) DVR-440H-AV . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 69 mm (H) x 318 mm (D) Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PAL/SECAM/ NTSC (external input only) Readable discs DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA) Recording discs and formats DVD-R/RW: VR mode and Video mode DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode DVD-RAM: VR mode DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode DVD+R DL: +VR mode Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time HDD DVR-640H-AV (160 GB) Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 34 to 455 h DVR-440H-AV (80 GB) Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 h Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 170 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h to 227 h Additional information 16 DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m (DVD-R DL only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m Timer Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display) Tuner Receivable channels SECAM B/G PAL B/G VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF Frequency 47 MHz to 89 MHz Channel E2 to E4 X to Z 104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12 S1 to S20 M1 to M10 U1 to U10 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 SECAM L PAL I Frequency 44 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz Channel A to C X to Z D to J 11, 13 S1 to S20 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 SECAM D/K PAL D/K VHF (low) Frequency 49 MHz to 65 MHz Channel FB, FC1, FC Frequency 49 MHz to 94 MHz Channel R1 to R5 VHF (high) 104 MHz to 300 MHz F1 to F6 B to Q 104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 to R12 S1 to S20 Hyper UHF 300 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 470 MHz to 862 MHz 21 to 69 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM L - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM Input/Output VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω (IEC connector) Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 2 (front) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), RCA jack (Input 2) Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1) RCA jack (Output) S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 2 (front) Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), 4 pin mini DIN (Input 2) S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1), 4 pin mini DIN (Output) Component video output Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω) PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks RGB input Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1) RGB output Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1) Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 2 (front) L/R Input level During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 V rms (Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1), RCA jacks (Input 2) Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output During audio output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 V rms (Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1), RCA jacks (Output) Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack Digital audio ouptut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial DV input (DVR-640H-AV only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front) (i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard) G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack USB (DVR-640H-AV only) . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front) English DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h (DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h 149 En 16 Additional information AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment) AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor. PIN no. AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1) 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND Supplied accessories Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-LINK™ cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved . 150 En English 151 En Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 Printed in K002_A_En <AREXXXX-A>